SLK - Mercedes-Benz USA › ... › operators ›...
358
SLK Operator's Manual Order no. 65153349 13 Part no. 172 584 92 00 Edition A 2016 É1725849200CËÍ 1725849200 SLK Operator's Manual
Transcript of SLK - Mercedes-Benz USA › ... › operators ›...
SLKOperator's Manual
Order no. 65153349 13 Part no. 172 584 92 00 Edition A 2016
É1725849200CËÍ1725849200
SLKO
perat
or'sM
anual
Publication detailsInternet
Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)
Editorial office
©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany
SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® areregistered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark ofJohnson Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trade-marks of Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Har-man International Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are reg-istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora-tion.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are reg-istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:
G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.
H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.
i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.
X This symbol indicates an instructionthat must be followed.
X Several of these symbols in succes-sion indicate an instruction with sev-eral steps.
(Ypage)
This symbol tells you where you canfind more information about a topic.
YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on thenext page.
Dis‐play
This text indicates a message in themultifunction/COMAND/Audio dis-play.
As at 02.10.2014
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving. For your own safetyand a longer vehicle life, follow the instruc-tions and warning notices in this manual.Ignoring them could result in damage to thevehicle or personal injury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RmodelRorderRcountry specificationRavailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass alldocuments on to the new owner.You can also use the Mercedes-Benz GuidesApp:
Apple® iOS
Android™
Please note that the Mercedes-Benz GuidesApp may not yet be available in your country.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company
1725849200 É1725849200CËÍ
Index ....................................................... 4
Introduction ......................................... 21
At a glance ........................................... 29
Safety ................................................... 39
Opening and closing ........................... 71
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 95
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 107
Climate control ................................. 121
Driving and parking .......................... 137
On-board computer and displays .... 193
Stowage and features ...................... 253
Maintenance and care ...................... 275
Breakdown assistance ..................... 289
Wheels and tires ............................... 307
Technical data ................................... 343
Contents 3
1, 2, 3 ...12 V socket
see Sockets
AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message ............................ 212Function/notes ................................ 61Important safety notes .................... 61Warning lamp ................................. 243
AccidentAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 57
Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 127Active light function ......................... 111ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 69Adaptive Brake Assist
Function/notes ................................ 64Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Display message ............................ 227Function/notes ............................. 112Switching on/off ........................... 112
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 349Air bags
Deployment ..................................... 54Display message ............................ 223Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 47Head bag ......................................... 48Important safety notes .................... 46Introduction ..................................... 46Knee bag .......................................... 47Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 49PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-tor lamp ........................................... 41Side impact air bag .......................... 47
Air ventsImportant safety notes .................. 134Setting ........................................... 134Setting the blower output of theAIRSCARF vents ............................. 135Setting the center air vents ........... 134Setting the side air vents ............... 135Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 100
Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control
AIRGUIDE ............................................. 90AIRSCARF
Problem (malfunction) ................... 100Switching on/off ........................... 100
AIRSCARF ventsSetting the blower output .............. 135
AlarmATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 69Switching off (ATA) .......................... 69Switching the function on/off(ATA) ................................................ 69
Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Ambient lightingSetting the brightness (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 205
AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 208Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)Anti-Theft Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Ashtray ............................................... 258Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 203Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 202ASSYST PLUS
Displaying a service message ........ 281Hiding a service message .............. 280Resetting the service interval dis-play ................................................ 281Service message ............................ 280Special service requirements ......... 281
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 69Function ........................................... 69Switching off the alarm .................... 69
ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 203Display message ............................ 230Function/notes ............................. 187
Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 200Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
4 Index
Authorized workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop
AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 227see Lights
Automatic car wash (care) ............... 282Automatic engine start (ECO start/stop function) .................................... 145Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 144Automatic headlamp mode .............. 108Automatic transmission
Accelerator pedal position ............. 151Automatic drive program ............... 153Changing gear ............................... 151Display message ............................ 236Driving tips .................................... 151Emergency running mode .............. 157Engaging the park position ............ 149Kickdown ....................................... 152Manual drive program .................... 153Manual drive program (vehicleswith Sports package AMG) ............ 155Oil temperature (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 208Overview ........................................ 148Problem (malfunction) ................... 157Program selector button ................ 152Pulling away ................................... 142Releasing the parking lock man-ually ............................................... 157Selector lever ................................ 148Starting the engine ........................ 142Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 152Transmission position display ........ 149Transmission positions .................. 151
Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 157
BBackup lamp
Changing bulbs .............................. 117BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 62Battery (SmartKey)
Checking .......................................... 75Important safety notes .................... 75Replacing ......................................... 75
Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 298Display message ............................ 228Important safety notes .................. 296Jump starting ................................. 299Overview ........................................ 296
Beltsee Seat belts
Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 203Display message ............................ 231Notes/function .............................. 188
Brake Assistsee BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 218Notes ............................................. 350
Brake force distributionsee EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)
Brake lampsDisplay message ............................ 225
BrakesABS .................................................. 61Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 64BAS .................................................. 62Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 350Display message ............................ 212EBD .................................................. 69High-performance brake system .... 167Important safety notes .................. 165Maintenance .................................. 166Parking brake ................................ 161Riding tips ...................................... 165Warning lamp ................................. 243
BreakdownWhere will I find...? ........................ 290see Flat tiresee Towing away
Brightness control (instrumentcluster lighting) ................................... 31Bulbs
see Replacing bulbs
Index 5
CCalifornia
Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 23
Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages
Carsee Vehicle
Car keysee SmartKey
CareCar wash ........................................ 282Carpets .......................................... 288Display ........................................... 286Exhaust pipe .................................. 285Exterior lights ................................ 285Gear or selector lever .................... 286Interior ........................................... 286Matte finish ................................... 284Notes ............................................. 281Paint .............................................. 283Plastic trim .................................... 286Power washer ................................ 283Roof lining ...................................... 288Seat belt ........................................ 287Seat cover ..................................... 287Sensors ......................................... 285Steering wheel ............................... 286Trim pieces .................................... 286Washing by hand ........................... 282Wheels ........................................... 284Windows ........................................ 284Wiper blades .................................. 285Wooden trim .................................. 286
CD player/CD changer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 201Center console
Lower section .................................. 35Upper section .................................. 34
Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 206Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 72
Changing bulbsHigh-beam headlamps ................... 116Low-beam headlamps .................... 116Reversing lamps ............................ 117
Side marker lamps (rear) ............... 116Turn signals (front) ......................... 116
ChildRestraint system .............................. 59
Child seatForward-facing restraint system ...... 60On the front-passenger seat ............ 60Rearward-facing restraint system .... 60
ChildrenSpecial seat belt retractor ............... 58
Cigarette lighter ................................ 258Cleaning
Mirror turn signal ........................... 285Climate control
Air-conditioning system ................. 123Automatic climate control (dual-zone) .............................................. 125Controlling automatically ............... 129Cooling with air dehumidification .. 127Defrosting the windows ................. 131Defrosting the windshield .............. 131General notes ................................ 122Indicator lamp ................................ 129Information about using auto-matic climate control ..................... 126Maximum cooling .......................... 131Notes on using the air-condition-ing system ..................................... 124Overview of systems ...................... 122Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 133Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 129Refrigerant ..................................... 352Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 352Setting the air distribution ............. 130Setting the air vents ...................... 134Setting the airflow ......................... 130Setting the temperature ................ 129Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 133Switching on/off ........................... 127Switching residual heat on/off ...... 133Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 132Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 130
6 Index
CockpitOverview .......................................... 30see Instrument cluster
Collapsible spare wheelInflating ......................................... 340see Emergency spare wheel
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS
Activating/deactivating ................. 203Display message ............................ 219Operation/notes .............................. 62
COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 286
Combination switch .......................... 110Compass
Calibrating ..................................... 273Calling up ....................................... 272Setting ........................................... 272
Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 197Convenience closing feature .............. 85Convenience opening feature
see Side windowsCoolant (engine)
Checking the level ......................... 279Display message ............................ 227Filling capacity ............................... 351Important safety notes .................. 350Temperature (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 208Temperature gauge ........................ 195Warning lamp ................................. 249
Coolingsee Climate control
Copyright ............................................. 28Cornering light function
Display message ............................ 224Function/notes ............................. 111
Crash-responsive emergency light-ing ....................................................... 114Cruise control
Cruise control lever ....................... 169Deactivating ................................... 170Display message ............................ 233Driving system ............................... 168Function/notes ............................. 168Important safety notes .................. 168
Setting a speed .............................. 169Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 169
Cup holderCenter console .............................. 257Important safety notes .................. 256
Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 26Customer Relations Department ....... 26
DDashboard
see Instrument clusterData
see Technical dataDaytime running lamps
Display message ............................ 226Function/notes ............................. 108Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 205
Declarations of conformity ................. 25Delayed switch-off
Exterior lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 205Interior lighting .............................. 206
Diagnostics connection ...................... 25Digital speedometer ......................... 198Display messages
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 280Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 211Driving systems ............................. 230Engine ............................................ 227General notes ................................ 211Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 211KEYLESS-GO .................................. 240Lights ............................................. 224Safety systems .............................. 212SmartKey ....................................... 240Tires ............................................... 234Vehicle ........................................... 236
Distance recorder ............................. 197Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 251Distance warning function
Function/notes ................................ 63DISTRONIC PLUS
Cruise control lever ....................... 172Deactivating ................................... 176
Index 7
Display message ............................ 232Displays in the multifunction dis-play ................................................ 176Driving tips .................................... 177Function/notes ............................. 170Important safety notes .................. 171Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 175Stopping ........................................ 173Warning lamp ................................. 251
DoorsAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 206Automatic locking (switch) ............... 79Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 72Control panel ................................... 37Display message ............................ 238Emergency locking ........................... 80Emergency unlocking ....................... 80Important safety notes .................... 78Opening (from inside) ...................... 78Overview .......................................... 78
Drinking and driving ......................... 164Drive program
Automatic ...................................... 153Display ........................................... 149Manual ........................................... 153Manual (vehicles with Sportspackage AMG) ............................... 155SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 208
Driver's doorsee Doors
Driving abroadMercedes-Benz Service ................. 281
Driving on flooded roads .................. 167Driving safety systems
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 61ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 69Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 64BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 62COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS ................................................ 62Distance warning function ............... 63EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 69ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 65
Important safety information ........... 61Overview .......................................... 61
Driving systemsATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 187Blind Spot Assist ............................ 188Cruise control ................................ 168Display message ............................ 230DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 170Driving Assistance package ........... 188Dynamic handling package ............ 178HOLD function ............................... 179Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 189Parking Guidance ........................... 184PARKTRONIC ................................. 181
Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 151Brakes ........................................... 165Break-in period .............................. 138DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 177Downhill gradient ........................... 165Drinking and driving ....................... 164Driving in winter ............................. 167Driving on flooded roads ................ 167Driving on wet roads ...................... 167Exhaust check ............................... 164Fuel ................................................ 164General .......................................... 163Hydroplaning ................................. 167Icy road surfaces ........................... 167Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 166Snow chains .................................. 311Wet road surface ........................... 166
DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 201
Dynamic handling packageFunction/notes ............................. 178
EEASY-ENTRY feature
Activating/deactivating ................. 206Function/notes ............................. 101
EASY-EXIT featureCrash-responsive ........................... 102Function/notes ............................. 101Switching on/off ........................... 206
8 Index
EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)
Display message ............................ 214Function/notes ................................ 69
ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 164On-board computer ....................... 198
ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 145Automatic engine switch-off .......... 144Deactivating/activating ................. 145General information ....................... 143Important safety notes .................. 143Introduction ................................... 143
Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
EmergencyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 57
Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 80Trunk ............................................... 82Vehicle ............................................. 80
Emergency spare wheelGeneral notes ................................ 339Important safety notes .................. 339Removing ....................................... 340Stowing .......................................... 340Technical data ............................... 342
Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 54
Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 22
EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 249Display message ............................ 227ECO start/stop function ................ 143Engine number ............................... 346Irregular running ............................ 147Jump-starting ................................. 299Starting problems .......................... 147Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 142Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 142Switching off .................................. 161Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 303
Engine electronicsNotes ............................................. 344
Problem (malfunction) ................... 147Engine oil
Adding ........................................... 278Additives ........................................ 349Checking the oil level ..................... 277Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 277Display message ............................ 229Filling capacity ............................... 349Notes about oil grades ................... 349Notes on oil level/consumption .... 277Temperature (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 208Viscosity ........................................ 349
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 208Characteristics ................................. 66Deactivating/activating (exceptMercedes‑AMG vehicles) ................. 66Deactivating/activating(Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) ................ 67Display message ............................ 212Function/notes ................................ 65General notes .................................. 65Important safety information ........... 66Warning lamp ................................. 245
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ...................................................... 66Exhaust check ................................... 164Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 285Exterior lighting
Setting options .............................. 108see Lights
Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 103Dipping (automatic) ....................... 104Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 207Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 104Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 104Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 104Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 106Storing the parking position .......... 105
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 255
Index 9
FFiller cap
see RefuelingFilling capacities (Technical data) ... 347Flat tire
MOExtended tires .......................... 291Preparing the vehicle ..................... 291TIREFIT kit ...................................... 292see Emergency spare wheel
Floormats ........................................... 273Frequencies
Mobile phone ................................. 344Two-way radio ................................ 344
FuelAdditives ........................................ 348Consumption statistics .................. 197Displaying the current consump-tion ................................................ 198Displaying the range ...................... 198Driving tips .................................... 164Fuel gauge ....................................... 31Grade (gasoline) ............................ 348Important safety notes .................. 347Problem (malfunction) ................... 160Refueling ........................................ 158Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 347
Fuel filler flapOpening ......................................... 159
Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 198
Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 347Problem (malfunction) ................... 160
Fuse allocation chart (vehicle toolkit) ...................................................... 290Fuses
Allocation chart ............................. 304Before changing ............................. 304Fuse box in the engine compart-ment .............................................. 304Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 305Important safety notes .................. 304
GGarage door opener
Clearing the memory ..................... 271General notes ................................ 268Important safety notes .................. 268Opening/closing the garage door .. 271Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 268Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 269
Gear indicator (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 208Genuine parts ...................................... 21Glove box ........................................... 254
HHandbrake
see Parking brakeHazard warning lamps ...................... 111
Display message ............................ 240Head bags
Display message ............................ 221Operation ......................................... 48
Head level heating (AIRSCARF) ........ 100Head restraints
Adjusting ......................................... 98see NECK-PRO head restraints
HeadlampsCleaning system (notes) ................ 351Fogging up ..................................... 113see Automatic headlamp mode
Heatingsee Climate control
High-beam headlampsChanging bulbs .............................. 116Display message ............................ 225Switching on/off ........................... 110
Hill start assist .................................. 142HOLD function
Activating ....................................... 179Deactivating ................................... 180Display message ............................ 230Function/notes ............................. 179
HoodClosing ........................................... 277Display message ............................ 238Important safety notes .................. 276
10 Index
Opening ......................................... 276Horn ...................................................... 30Hydroplaning ..................................... 167
IIgnition lock
see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 69Indicator and warning lamps
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS .............................................. 251
Indicator lampssee Warning and indicator lamps
Indicatorssee Turn signals
Instrument clusterOverview .......................................... 31Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 194Interior lighting
Automatic control .......................... 113Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 206Emergency lighting ........................ 114Manual control ............................... 114Overview ........................................ 113Reading lamp ................................. 113Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 205
JJack
Storage location ............................ 290Using ............................................. 332
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 299
KKey positions
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 140SmartKey ....................................... 139
KEYLESS-GOConvenience closing feature ............ 85Deactivation ..................................... 73Display message ............................ 240Locking ............................................ 73
Removing the Start/Stop button ... 141Start/Stop button .......................... 140Starting the engine ........................ 142Unlocking ......................................... 73
KickdownDriving tips .................................... 152Manual drive program .................... 156
Knee bag .............................................. 47
LLamps
see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating ................. 204Display message ............................ 231Function/information .................... 189
Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 208License plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 225Light function, active
Display message ............................ 226Light sensor (display message) ....... 227Lights
Activating/deactivating the inte-rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 206Active light function ....................... 111Automatic headlamp mode ............ 108Cornering light function ................. 111Fogged up headlamps .................... 113Hazard warning lamps ................... 111High beam flasher .......................... 110High-beam headlamps ................... 110Light switch ................................... 108Low-beam headlamps .................... 109Parking lamps ................................ 110Rear fog lamp ................................ 109Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 205Standing lamps .............................. 110Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 205Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 205
Index 11
Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 205Turn signals ................................... 110see Interior lightingsee Replacing bulbs
Lockingsee Central locking
Locking (doors)Automatic ........................................ 79Emergency locking ........................... 80From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 79
Locking centrallysee Central locking
Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 206Low-beam headlamps
Changing bulbs .............................. 116Display message ............................ 224Switching on/off ........................... 109
Luggage coversee Trunk partition
Lumbar support ................................... 99
MM+S tires ............................................ 310MAGIC SKY CONTROL ......................... 91Malfunction message
see Display messagesMatte finish (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 284mbrace
Call priority .................................... 263Display message ............................ 218Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 264Downloading routes ....................... 267Emergency call .............................. 261General notes ................................ 259Geo fencing ................................... 267Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 266MB info call button ........................ 263Remote fault diagnosis .................. 266Remote vehicle locking .................. 265Roadside Assistance button .......... 262Search & Send ............................... 264Self-test ......................................... 260
Speed alert .................................... 267System .......................................... 260Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 268Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 265
Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 74Inserting .......................................... 75Locking vehicle ................................ 80Removing ......................................... 74Unlocking the driver's door .............. 80
Media Interfacesee Separate operating instructions
Memory card (audio) ......................... 201Memory function ............................... 106Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 211Messages
see Display messagesMirrors
see Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Mobile phoneFrequencies ................................... 344Installation ..................................... 344Menu (on-board computer) ............ 201Transmission output (maximum) .... 344
Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 74MOExtended tires .............................. 291Mounting wheels
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 334Mounting a new wheel ................... 334Preparing the vehicle ..................... 331Raising the vehicle ......................... 332Removing a wheel .......................... 333Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 331
MP3see separate operating instructions
Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 196Permanent display ......................... 205
Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer .. 195Overview .......................................... 33
12 Index
NNavigation
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 199NECK-PRO head restraints
Important safety notes .................... 56Operation ......................................... 56Resetting triggered .......................... 56
Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 138
OOccupant Classification System(OCS)
Conditions ....................................... 49Faults ............................................... 53Operation ......................................... 49System self-test ............................... 51
Occupant safetyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 57Children in the vehicle ..................... 57Important safety notes .................... 41Introduction to the restraint sys-tem .................................................. 40Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 49PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 41Pets in the vehicle ........................... 60PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 56Restraint system warning lamp ........ 41
OCSConditions ....................................... 49Faults ............................................... 53Operation ......................................... 49System self-test ............................... 51
Odometer ........................................... 197Oil
see Engine oilOn-board computer
AMG menu ..................................... 208Assistance menu ........................... 202Audio menu ................................... 200Convenience submenu .................. 206Display messages .......................... 211
Displaying a service message ........ 281DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 176Factory settings submenu ............. 207Important safety notes .................. 194Instrument cluster submenu .......... 204Lighting submenu .......................... 205Menu overview .............................. 197Message memory .......................... 211Navigation menu ............................ 199Operation ....................................... 195RACETIMER ................................... 208Service menu ................................. 204Settings menu ............................... 204Standard display ............................ 197Telephone menu ............................ 201Trip menu ...................................... 197Vehicle submenu ........................... 206Video DVD operation ..................... 201
Operating safetyDeclaration of conformity ................ 25Important safety notes .................... 24
Operating systemsee On-board computer
Operator's ManualVehicle equipment ........................... 22
Outside temperature display ........... 195Overhead control panel ...................... 36
PPaint code number ............................ 345Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 283Panic alarm .......................................... 40Parking
Engaging park position .................. 149Important safety notes .................. 160Parking brake ................................ 161Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 105see PARKTRONIC
Parking aidParking Guidance ........................... 184see Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC
Parking assistancesee PARKTRONIC
Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 215
Index 13
Electric parking brake .................... 161Warning lamp ................................. 248
Parking GuidanceDisplay message ............................ 232Important safety notes .................. 184
Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 110
PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 183Driving system ............................... 181Function/notes ............................. 181Important safety notes .................. 181Problem (malfunction) ................... 184Range of the sensors ..................... 181Warning display ............................. 182
PASSENGER AIR BAGDisplay message ............................ 223Problems (malfunction) .................. 223
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFIndicator lamp .................................. 41
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 60Pivoting draft stop
see AIRGUIDEPlastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 286Power washers .................................. 283Power windows
see Side windowsPRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)
Display message ............................ 218Operation ......................................... 56
Program selector button .................. 152Protection against theft
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 69Immobilizer ...................................... 69
Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 21
Pulling awayAutomatic transmission ................. 142General notes ................................ 142
QQR code
Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1Rescue card ..................................... 27
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 25
RRACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 208Radio
Selecting a station ......................... 200Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle
Declaration of conformity ................ 25Reading lamp ..................................... 113Rear fog lamp
Display message ............................ 226Switching on/off ........................... 109
Rear lampssee Lights
Rear window defrosterProblem (malfunction) ................... 133Switching on/off ........................... 132
Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) ........................ 103Dipping (automatic) ....................... 104
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)
Important safety notes .................. 352Refueling
Fuel gauge ....................................... 31Important safety notes .................. 158Refueling process .......................... 158see Fuel
Releasing the parking lock man-ually (automatic transmission) ........ 157Remote control
Programming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 268
Replacing bulbsImportant safety notes .................. 114Overview of bulb types .................. 115Removing/replacing the cover(front wheel arch) .......................... 115
Reporting safety defects .................... 26Rescue card ......................................... 27Reserve (fuel tank)
see FuelReserve fuel
Display message ............................ 230Warning lamp ................................. 249see Fuel
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 133
14 Index
Restraint systemDisplay message ............................ 220Introduction ..................................... 40Warning lamp ................................. 248Warning lamp (function) ................... 41
Reverse gearEngaging (automatic transmis-sion) ............................................... 148
Reversible floor panel (trunk) .......... 256Reversing feature
Side windows ................................... 83Reversing lamps (display mes-sage) ................................................... 226Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 23Roof
Display message ............................ 239Important safety notes .................... 86Opening/closing (with roofswitch) ............................................. 87Opening/closing (with Smart-Key) ................................................. 88Overview .......................................... 86Problem (malfunction) ..................... 93Relocking ......................................... 88
Roof carrier ........................................ 256Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 288Roof switch .......................................... 87
SSafety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 57Safety system
see Driving safety systemsSeat belts
Adjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 45Cleaning ......................................... 287Correct usage .................................. 43Fastening ......................................... 44Important safety guidelines ............. 42Introduction ..................................... 42Releasing ......................................... 45Switching belt adjustment on/off(on-board computer) ...................... 207Warning lamp ................................. 242Warning lamp (function) ................... 45
SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 98Adjusting (manually) ........................ 98Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port .................................................. 99Adjusting the head restraint ............ 98Cleaning the cover ......................... 287Correct driver's seat position ........... 96Important safety notes .................... 97Overview .......................................... 97Seat heating problem .................... 100Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 106Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 100Switching seat heating on/off ......... 99
Selector leverCleaning ......................................... 286
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 285Service menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 204Service message
see ASSYST PLUSService products
Brake fluid ..................................... 350Coolant (engine) ............................ 350Engine oil ....................................... 349Fuel ................................................ 347Important safety notes .................. 347Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 352Washer fluid ................................... 351
Setting the air distribution ............... 130Setting the airflow ............................ 130Settings
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 207On-board computer ....................... 204
SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 208Side impact air bag ............................. 47Side marker lamp
Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 116Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 226Side windows
Cleaning ......................................... 284Convenience closing feature ............ 85Important safety information ........... 83Opening/closing (all) ....................... 84
Index 15
Opening/closing (front) ................... 83Overview .......................................... 83Problem (malfunction) ..................... 86Resetting ......................................... 85Reversing feature ............................. 83
SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 75Changing the programming ............. 74Checking the battery ....................... 75Convenience opening feature .......... 84Display message ............................ 240Door central locking/unlocking ....... 72Important safety notes .................... 72Loss ................................................. 77Mechanical key ................................ 74Opening/closing the roof ................ 88Overview .......................................... 72Positions (ignition lock) ................. 139Problem (malfunction) ..................... 77Starting the engine ........................ 142
Snow chains ...................................... 311Sockets
Center console .............................. 259General notes ................................ 259Under the armrest ......................... 259
Spare wheelStowing .......................................... 340
Special seat belt retractor .................. 58Specialist workshop ............................ 25Speed, controlling
see Cruise controlSpeedometer
Digital ............................................ 198In the Instrument cluster ................. 31Segments ...................................... 194Selecting the display unit ............... 204
SPORT handling modeDeactivating/activating(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 67Warning lamp ................................. 246
Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 226Switching on/off ........................... 110
Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function
Starting (engine) ................................ 141Steering (display message) .............. 238
Steering wheelAdjusting (electrically) ................... 101Adjusting (manually) ...................... 101Button overview ............................... 33Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 195Cleaning ......................................... 286Important safety notes .................. 100Paddle shifters ............................... 152Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 106
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 152Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 208Stowage areas ................................... 254Stowage compartments
Armrest (under) ............................. 255Center console .............................. 255Cup holders ................................... 256Door ............................................... 255Eyeglasses compartment ............... 255Glove box ....................................... 254Important safety information ......... 254Rear wall ........................................ 255Stowage net ................................... 256
Stowage net ....................................... 256Summer tires ..................................... 310Sun visor ............................................ 257Surround lighting (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 205Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 133
TTachometer ........................................ 195Tail lamps
Display message ............................ 225see Lights
Tank contentFuel gauge ....................................... 31
Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 347Emergency spare wheel ................. 342Information .................................... 344Tires/wheels ................................. 335Vehicle data ................................... 352
TELEAIDCall priority .................................... 263
16 Index
Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 264Downloading routes ....................... 267Emergency call .............................. 261General notes ................................ 259Geo fencing ................................... 267Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 266MB info call button ........................ 263Remote vehicle locking .................. 265Roadside Assistance button .......... 262Search & Send ............................... 264Self-test ......................................... 260Speed alert .................................... 267System .......................................... 260Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 268Vehicle Health Check .................... 266Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 265
TelephoneAccepting a call (multifunctionsteering wheel) .............................. 202Display message ............................ 239Menu (on-board computer) ............ 201Number from the phone book ........ 202Redialing ........................................ 202Rejecting/ending a call ................. 202
TemperatureCoolant .......................................... 195Coolant (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 208Engine oil (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 208Outside temperature ...................... 195Setting (climate control) ................ 129Transmission oil (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 208
Timesee separate operating instructions
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 208Tire pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 316Checking manually ........................ 315Display message ............................ 234Maximum ....................................... 314Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 294Notes ............................................. 313Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 294Recommended ............................... 311
Tire pressure loss warning systemGeneral notes ................................ 315Important safety notes .................. 315Restarting ...................................... 315
Tire pressure monitorChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 318Function/notes ............................. 316General notes ................................ 316Important safety notes .................. 316Radio type approval for the tirepressure monitor ........................... 319Restarting ...................................... 318Warning lamp ................................. 252Warning message .......................... 318
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 292Tire pressure not reached .............. 294Tire pressure reached .................... 294
TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 329Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 328Bar (definition) ............................... 328Changing a wheel .......................... 330Characteristics .............................. 327Checking ........................................ 309Curb weight (definition) ................. 329Definition of terms ......................... 327Direction of rotation ...................... 330Display message ............................ 234Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 330DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 328DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 327GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 328General notes ................................ 335GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 328GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 328Important safety notes .................. 308Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 328Information on driving .................... 308Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 328
Index 17
Labeling (overview) ........................ 324Load bearing index (definition) ...... 329Load index ..................................... 326Load index (definition) ................... 329M+S tires ....................................... 310Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 329Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 328Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 329Maximum tire load ......................... 326Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 329MOExtended tires .......................... 310Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 329Overview ........................................ 308PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 329Replacing ....................................... 330Service life ..................................... 310Sidewall (definition) ....................... 329Speed rating (definition) ................ 328Storing ........................................... 330Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 327Summer tires ................................. 310Temperature .................................. 323TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 329Tire bead (definition) ...................... 329Tire pressure (definition) ................ 329Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 328Tire size (data) ............................... 335Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 324Tire tread ....................................... 309Tire tread (definition) ..................... 329Total load limit (definition) ............. 330Traction ......................................... 323Traction (definition) ....................... 330Tread wear ..................................... 323Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 322Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 328Wear indicator (definition) ............. 330Wheel and tire combination ........... 337
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 328see Flat tire
Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 303Important safety notes .................. 301Installing the towing eye ................ 302Removing the towing eye ............... 302
Towing awayImportant safety guidelines ........... 301Installing the towing eye ................ 302Removing the towing eye ............... 302Transporting the vehicle ................ 303With both axles on the ground ....... 302With the rear axle raised ................ 303
TransmissionSelector lever ................................ 148see Automatic transmission
Transporting the vehicle .................. 303Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 286Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 197Trip odometer
Calling up ....................................... 197Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 199
TrunkEmergency release .......................... 82Important safety notes .................... 80Locking separately ........................... 82Opening (automatically from out-side) ................................................. 81Opening/closing (manually fromoutside) ............................................ 81Overview .......................................... 80
Trunk lidDisplay message ............................ 238Opening dimensions ...................... 352Opening/closing .............................. 80
Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 352Trunk partition
Display message ............................ 238General notes .................................. 88Opening/closing .............................. 89
Turn signalsChanging bulbs (front) ................... 116Display message ............................ 225Switching on/off ........................... 110
18 Index
Two-way radioFrequencies ................................... 344Installation ..................................... 344Transmission output (maximum) .... 344
Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate
UUnlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 80From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 79
Upshift indicator (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 208
VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 258Vehicle
Correct use ...................................... 26Data acquisition ............................... 27Display message ............................ 236Electronics ..................................... 344Equipment ....................................... 22Individual settings .......................... 204Limited Warranty ............................. 26Loading .......................................... 319Locking (in an emergency) ............... 80Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 72Lowering ........................................ 334Maintenance .................................... 23Parking for a long period ................ 163Pulling away ................................... 142Raising ........................................... 332Reporting problems ......................... 26Securing from rolling away ............ 331Tow-starting ................................... 301Towing away .................................. 301Transporting .................................. 303Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 80Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 72Vehicle data ................................... 352
Vehicle batterysee Battery (vehicle)
Vehicle data ....................................... 352Vehicle dimensions ........................... 352Vehicle emergency locking ................ 80
Vehicle identification numbersee VIN
Vehicle identification plate .............. 345Vehicle tool kit .................................. 290Video
Operating the DVD ......................... 201VIN ...................................................... 345
WWarning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 243Brakes ........................................... 243Check Engine ................................. 249Coolant .......................................... 249Distance warning ........................... 251DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 251ESP® .............................................. 245ESP® OFF ....................................... 246Fuel tank ........................................ 249Overview .......................................... 32PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 41Reserve fuel ................................... 249Restraint system ............................ 248Seat belt ........................................ 242SPORT handling mode ................... 246Tire pressure monitor .................... 252
Warranty .............................................. 22Washer fluid
Display message ............................ 239Wheel and tire combinations
Tires ............................................... 337Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 334Wheel chock ...................................... 331Wheels
Changing a wheel .......................... 330Checking ........................................ 309Cleaning ......................................... 284Emergency spare wheel ................. 339General notes ................................ 335Important safety notes .................. 308Information on driving .................... 308Interchanging/changing ................ 330Mounting a new wheel ................... 334Mounting a wheel .......................... 331Overview ........................................ 308Removing a wheel .......................... 333Storing ........................................... 330
Index 19
Tightening torque ........................... 334Wheel size/tire size ....................... 335
Wind screenInserting and removing .................... 89Preparing for installation .................. 89see AIRGUIDE
Windowssee Side windows
WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 131
Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system
Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 279Notes ............................................. 351
Windshield wipersDisplay message ............................ 240Problem (malfunction) ................... 120Replacing the wiper blades ............ 118Switching on/off ........................... 117
Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 310Slippery road surfaces ................... 167Snow chains .................................. 311
Winter operationOverview ........................................ 310
Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 310
Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 285Important safety notes .................. 118Replacing ....................................... 118
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 286Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
ZZONE function
Switching on/off ........................... 130
20 Index
Protection of the environment
General notes
H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.
Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.
Environmental concerns and recom-mendationsWherever the operating instructions requireyou to dispose of materials, first try to regen-erate or re-use them. Observe the relevantenvironmental rules and regulations whendisposing of materials. In this way you willhelp to protect the environment.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.
! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraint sys-tems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.
Introduction 21
Z
You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheelsas well as accessories relevant to safetywhich have not been approved by Mercedes.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Useonly genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts ofequal quality. Only use tires, wheels andaccessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts shouldtherefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main-tain a supply of genuineMercedes-Benz partsfor necessary service and repair work. In addi-tion, strategically located parts delivery cen-ters provide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification num-ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 345).
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences are possi-ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may notfeature all functions described here. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.The original purchase agreement lists all sys-tems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The Operator's Manual and MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and shouldbe kept in the vehicle.
Service and vehicle operation
WarrantyThe implied warranty for your vehicle appliesin accordance with the warranty terms andconditions in the Service and Warranty Infor-mation booklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed parts inaccordancewith the followingwarranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, RhodeIsland and Vermont Emission Control Sys-tem WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)
Replacement parts and accessories are cov-ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces-sories warranties. These are available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Should you lose your Service and War-ranty Information booklet, have an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for areplacement. The new Service and War-ranty Information booklet will be posted toyou.
22 Introduction
Information for customers in Califor-niaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after a rea-sonable number of repair attemptsMercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its author-ized repair or service facilities fail to fix one ormore substantial defects or malfunctions inthe vehicle that are covered by its expresswarranty. During the period of 18 monthsfrom original delivery of the vehicle or theaccumulation of 18,000miles (approximately29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle,whichever occurs first, a reasonable numberof repair attempts is presumed for a retailbuyer or lessee if one or more of the followingoccurs:(1) the same substantial defect or malfunc-
tion results in a condition that is likely tocause death or serious bodily injury if thevehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc-tion has been subject to repair two ormore times, and you have directly noti-fied Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writingof the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunc-tion of a less serious nature than cate-gory (1) has been subject to repair four ormore times and you have directly notifiedus in writing of the need for its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.
Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350
MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and Warranty Book-let with you when you bring the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser-vice advisor will record every service for youin the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Breakdown assistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgramoffers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis-tance" section in the Service and Warrantybooklet (Canada). You will find both in yourvehicle literature portfolio.
Change of address or change of own-ershipIn the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Notification of Address Change"in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim-ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con-tacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please sendus the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in
Introduction 23
Z
the Service and Guarantee booklet or simplycall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at1-800-387-0100.
Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconvertermay not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalytic con-verter.Rthe fuel may have a considerably loweroctane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe through our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write toone of the following addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Operating safety
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairs
carried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.
G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriageor parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the under-carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tirescould be damaged without the damagebeing visible. Components damaged in thisway can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of
24 Introduction
an accident, no longer withstand the strainthey are designed to.If the underbody paneling is damaged,combustible materials such as leaves,grass or twigs can gather between theunderbody and the underbody paneling. Ifthese materials come in contact with hotparts of the exhaust system, they can catchfire.In such situations, have the vehiclechecked and repaired immediately at aqualified specialist workshop. If on con-tinuing your journey you notice that drivingsafety is impaired, pull over and stop thevehicle immediately, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. In such cases,consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Declarations of conformity
Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper-ation is subject to the following two condi-tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm-ful interference, and 2) These devices mustaccept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired oper-ation. Changes ormodifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and (2) Thesedevicesmust accept any interference, includ-ing interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device."
Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. As a result,the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-tics connection in the vehicle.
G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.
! If the engine is switched off and equip-ment on the diagnostics connection isused, the starter battery may discharge.
Connecting equipment to the diagnosticsconnection can lead to emissions monitoringinformation being reset, for example. Thismay lead to the vehicle failing to meet therequirements of the next emissions test dur-ing the main inspection.
Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has the nec-essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali-fications to correctly carry out the workrequired on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.
Introduction 25
Z
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book-let.Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and modifica-tionsRwork on electronic components
Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when driv-ing your vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe vehicle technical dataRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehicles
Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problemagain with a Mercedes-Benz Center or con-tact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Actof 1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition to notify-ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov
Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manualabout the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
26 Introduction
QR codes for the rescue card
The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flapand on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In theevent of an accident, rescue services can usethe QR code to quickly find the appropriaterescue card for your vehicle. The current res-cue card contains the most important infor-mation about your vehicle in a compact form,e.g. the routing of the electric cables.You can find more information under http://portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/content/asportal/en/communication/informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.
Data stored in the vehicle
Data recordingThis vehicle is capable of recording diagnosticinformation relating to vehicle operation,mal-functions, and user settings. This may includeinformation about the performance or statusof various systems, including but not limitedto, engine, throttle, steering or brake sys-tems, that is stored and can be read out withsuitable devices, particularly when the vehi-cle is serviced. The data obtained is used toproperly diagnose and service your vehicle orto further optimize and develop vehicle func-tions.
COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID)If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle’soperation, the use of the vehicle in certainsituations, and the location of the vehiclemaybe compiled through COMAND or thembracesystem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual and/or the mbraceTerms and Conditions.
Event data recordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDRis to record data that will assist in under-standing how a vehicle’s systems performedin certain crash or near crash-like situations,such as during air bag deployment or whenhitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designedto record data related to vehicle dynamicsand safety systems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:Rhow various systems in your vehicle areoperatingRwhether or not the driver and passengerseat belts are fastenedRhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRhow fast the vehicle is travelingThis data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data isrecorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data is recorded bythe EDR under normal driving conditions andno personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) are recorded. However,other parties, such as law enforcement, cancombine the EDR data with the type of per-sonal identification data routinely acquiredduring a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the vehi-cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties that havethe special equipment, such as law enforce-ment, can read the information by accessingthe vehicle or the EDR.EDR data may be used in civil and criminalmatters as a tool in accident reconstruction,accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since theCrash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used toextract data from the EDR is commerciallyavailable, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Introduction 27
Z
("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all lia-bility arising from the extraction of this infor-mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz per-sonnel.MBUSA will not share EDR data with otherswithout the consent of the vehicle owners or,if the vehicle is leased, without the consent ofthe lessee. Exceptions to this representationinclude responses to subpoenas by lawenforcement; by federal, state or local gov-ernment; in connection with or arising out oflitigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiariesand affiliates; or, as required by law.Warning: The EDR is a component of theRestraint System Module. Tampering with,altering, modifying or removing the EDR com-ponent may result in a malfunction of theRestraint System Module and other systems.State laws or regulations regarding EDRs thatconflict with federal regulation are pre-emp-ted. This means that in the event of such con-flict, the federal regulation governs. As ofFebruary 2013, 13 states have enacted lawsrelating to EDRs.
Information on copyright
General informationInformation on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and itselectronic components is available on the fol-lowing website:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
28 Introduction
Cockpit ................................................. 30Instrument cluster .............................. 31Multifunction steering wheel ............. 33Center console .................................... 34Overhead control panel ...................... 36Door control panel .............................. 37
29
Ataglance
Cockpit
Function Page
: Steering wheel paddleshifters 152
; Combination switch 110
= Instrument cluster 31
? Horn
A PARKTRONIC warning dis-play 181
B Overhead control panel 36
C Climate control systems 122
D Ignition lock 139Start/Stop button 140
Function Page
E Adjusts the steering wheelmanually 100
F Adjusts the steering wheelelectrically 100
G Cruise control lever 169
H Electric parking brake 161
I Diagnostics connection 25
J Opens the hood 276
K Light switch 108
30 CockpitAt
aglance
Instrument cluster
Displays and controls
Function Page
: SpeedometerSpeedometer segments 194
; Fuel gaugeFuel filler flap location indi-cator8: the fuel fillercap is on the right-handside.
Function Page
= Tachometer 195
? Coolant temperature 195
A Multifunction display 196
B Instrument cluster lighting 194
i Information on displaying the outsidetemperature in the multifunction displaycan be found under "Outside temperaturedisplay" (Y page 195).
Instrument cluster 31
Ataglance
Warning and indicator lamps
Function Page
: L Low-beam head-lamps 109
; T Parking lamps 110
= K High-beam head-lamps 110
? ÷ ESP® 245
A F Electric parking brake(red) 248
B ! Electric parking brake(yellow) 248
C · Distance warning 251
D #! Turn signals 110
E h Tire pressure monitor 316
Function Page
F 6 Restraint system 40
G ü Seat belt 242
H M SPORT handlingmode (Mercedes-AMGvehicles) 246
I ? Coolant 249
J R Rear fog lamp 109
K ; Check Engine 249
L 8 Reserve fuel 249
M å ESP® OFF 245
N ! ABS 243
O $ Brakes 243
32 Instrument clusterAt
aglance
Multifunction steering wheel
Function Page
: Multifunction display 196
; COMAND display (see theseparate operating instruc-tions)
= ?
Switches on the Voice Con-trol System (see the sepa-rate operating instructions)
? ~
Rejects or ends a call 201Exits the telephone book/redial memory6
Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redialmem-oryWX
Adjusts the volume8
Mute
Function Page
A =;
Selects a menu 1959:
Selects a submenu orscrolls through lists 195a
Confirms a selection 195Hides display messages 211
B %
Back 195Switches off the Voice Con-trol System (see the sepa-rate operating instructions)
Multifunction steering wheel 33
Ataglance
Center console
Center console, upper section
Function Page
: COMAND; see the separateoperating instructions
; c Seat heating 99
= Ò AIRSCARF 100
? c PARKTRONIC 181
A è ECO start/stop func-tion 143
Function Page
B £ Hazard warninglamps 111
C 4 PASSENGER AIR BAGON/OFF indicator lamp 41
D å ESP® 66
E à Dynamic handlingpackage with sports mode 178
34 Center consoleAt
aglance
Center console, lower section
Function Page
F Stowage compartment 254Ashtray 258Cigarette lighter 258Socket 259
G Selector lever 148
H Cup holder 256
I Stowage compartmentwithMedia Interface 254
Function Page
J Roof switch cover 87
K COMAND controller; seethe separate operatinginstructions
L Ú Selects the drive pro-gram 152Ñ Selects the drive pro-gram (Mercedes-AMG SLK55) 152
Center console 35
Ataglance
Overhead control panel
Function Page
: p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 113
; c Switches the interiorlighting on/off 114
= µ Operates MAGIC SKYCONTROL 91
? p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 113
A | Switches the auto-matic interior lighting con-trol on/off 113
B Eyeglasses compartment 255
Function Page
C ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 263
D Rear-view mirror 103
E Buttons for the garage dooropener 271
F F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbrace sys-tem) 262
G G SOS button (mbracesystem) 261
36 Overhead control panelAt
aglance
Door control panel
Function Page
: Opens the door 78
; %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 79
= Adjusts the seats electri-cally 98
? r45=Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors and steer-ing wheel 106
A ö Folds the exteriormir-rors in/out 104
Function Page
B \ Selects the right exte-rior mirror 103
C W Opens/closes theright side window 83
D WOpens/closes the leftside window 83
E 7 Adjusts the exteriormirrors 103
F Z Selects the left exte-rior mirror 103
Door control panel 37
Ataglance
38
Useful information .............................. 40Panic alarm .......................................... 40Occupant safety .................................. 40Children in the vehicle ........................ 57Pets in the vehicle ............................... 60Driving safety systems ....................... 61Protection against theft ..................... 69
39
Safety
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).
Panic alarm
X To activate: press! button: for atleast one second.A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed.
X To deactivate: press! button:again.
orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehi-cle.
Occupant safety
Introduction to the restraint systemThe restraint system can reduce the risk ofvehicle occupants coming into contact withparts of the vehicle's interior in the event ofan accident. The restraint system can alsoreduce the forces to which vehicle occupantsare subjected during an accident.The restraint system comprises:RSeat belt systemRAir bagsThe components of the restraint systemworkin conjunction with each other. They can onlydeploy their protective function if, at all times,all vehicle occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly(Y page 43)Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraintproperly (Y page 97).
As the driver, you also have to make sure thatthe steering wheel is adjusted correctly.Observe the information relating to the cor-rect driver's seat position (Y page 96).You also have tomake sure that an air bag caninflate properly if deployed (Y page 46).An air bag supplements a correctly worn seatbelt. As an additional safety device, the airbag increases the level of protection for vehi-cle occupants in the event of an accident. Forexample, if, in the event of an accident, theprotection offered by the seat belt is suffi-cient, the air bags are not deployed. When anaccident occurs, only the air bags thatincrease protection in that particular accidentsituation are deployed. However, seat beltsand air bags generally do not protect againstobjects penetrating the vehicle from the out-side.Information on restraint system operationcan be found under "Triggering of the Emer-gency Tensioning Devices and air bags"(Y page 54).For more information about children travelingwith you in the vehicle and on child restraint
40 Occupant safetySafety
systems, see "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 57).
Important safety notes
G WARNINGModifications to the restraint system maycause it to no longer work as intended. Therestraint system may then not perform itsintended protective function andmay fail in anaccident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Never modify parts of the restraint system.Never tamper with the wiring, the electroniccomponents or their software.If it is necessary tomodify an air bag system toaccommodate a person with disabilities, con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center fordetails. USA only: for further information con-tact our Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372).
Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on andat regular intervals while the engine is run-ning. Therefore, malfunctions can be detec-ted in good time.The 6 restraint system warning lamp inthe instrument cluster lights upwhen the igni-tion is switched on. It goes out no later than afew seconds after the vehicle is started. Thecomponents of the restraint system are inoperational readiness.A malfunction has occurred if the 6restraint system warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition isswitched onRdoes not go out after a few seconds withthe engine runningRlights up again while the engine is running
G WARNINGIf restraint system is malfunctioning, restraintsystem components may be triggered unin-tentionally or might not be triggered at all inthe event of an accident with a high rate ofvehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-ple. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp; are part of the Occupant Classifica-tion System (OCS).The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front air bag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: thefront-passenger front air bag is enabled. If,in the event of an accident, all deploymentcriteria are met, the front-passenger frontair bag is deployed.RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: thefront-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted. It will then not be deployed in the eventof an accident.
Occupant safety 41
Safety
Z
Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag must either be deactivated or enabled;see the following points. You must make sureof this both before and during a journey.RChildren in a child restraint system:whether the front-passenger front air bag isenabled or deactivated depends on theinstalled child restraint system, and the ageand size of the child. Therefore, be sure toobserve the notes on the "Occupant Clas-sification System (OCS)" (Y page 49) andon "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 57).There youwill also find instructions on rear-ward and forward-facing child restraint sys-tems on the front-passenger seat.RAll other persons: depending on the clas-sification of the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger frontair bag is enabled or deactivated(Y page 49). Be sure to observe the noteson "Seat belts“ (Y page 42) and "Air bags"(Y page 46). There you can also find infor-mation on the correct seat position.
Seat belts
IntroductionSeat belts are the most effective means ofrestricting the movement of vehicle occu-pants in the event of an accident or the vehi-cle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with partsof the vehicle interior or being ejected fromthe vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helpsto keep the vehicle occupant in the best posi-tion in relation to the air bag.The seat belt system comprises:RSeat beltsREmergency Tensioning Devices and seatbelt force limiters
If the seat belt is pulled by the belt loopquickly or with a jerky movement, the beltretractor locks. The belt strap cannot beextracted any further.
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightensthe seat belt in an accident, pulling the beltclose against the body. However it does notpull the vehicle occupant back in the directionof the backrest.The Emergency Tensioning Device does notcorrect an incorrect seat position or the rout-ing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt.When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helpsto reduce the force exerted by the seat belt onthe vehicle occupant.The seat belt force limiters are synchronizedwith the front air bags which absorb part ofthe deceleration force. This can reduce theforce exerted on the vehicle occupants duringan accident.
! If the front-passenger seat is not occu-pied, do not engage the seat belt tongue inthe buckle on the front-passenger seat.Otherwise, in the event of an accident, theEmergency Tensioning Device and front-passenger front air bag may be triggeredand would need to be replaced.
Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint sys-tems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEven where this is not required by law, allvehicle occupants should correctly fastentheir seat belts before starting the journey.
G WARNINGIf the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-not protect as intended. Furthermore, anincorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-tion. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.
42 Occupant safetySafety
Make sure that all vehicle occupants areseated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt.
G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.
G WARNINGPersons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannotfasten the seat belt correctly without an addi-tional suitable restraint system. If the seatbelt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protectas intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas-tened seat belt can cause additional injury, forexample, in an accident, during braking or anabrupt change of direction. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.For this reason, always secure persons under5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraintsystems.
If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this Mercedes-Benzvehicle. The child restraint system must beappropriate to the age, weight and size ofthe childRalways observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec-tion of this Operator's Manual(Y page 57) in addition to the child
restraint system manufacturer's installa-tion instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes on the "Occupant classifica-tion system (OCS)" (Y page 49)
G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremelydirty, bleach or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltanchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi-fied
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage inan accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-sioning Devices could accidentally trigger orfail to deploy when necessary. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertiareels. Make sure that the seat belts areundamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.
Only use seat belts that have been approvedfor your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Proper use of the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 42).All vehicle occupants must be wearing theseat belt correctly before beginning the jour-ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu-pants are always wearing the seat belt cor-rectly while the vehicle is in motion.
Occupant safety 43
Safety
Z
When fastening the seat belt, always makesure that:Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to thebelt buckle belonging to that seat.Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.Rthe seat belt is not twisted.Only then can the forces which occur bedistributed over the area of the belt.Rthe shoulder section of the belt is alwaysrouted across the center of your shoulder.The shoulder section of the belt must notcome into contact with your neck or berouted under your arm.Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low downas possible across your lap.The lap belt must always be routed acrossyour hip joints and not across your abdo-men. This applies particularly to pregnantwomen. If necessary, push the lap beltdown to your hip joint and pull it tight usingthe shoulder section of the belt.Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp,pointed or fragile objects.If you have such items located on or in yourclothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses,store these in a suitable place.Ronly one person is using a seat belt at atime.Infants and children must never travel sit-ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In theevent of an accident, they could be crushedbetween the vehicle occupant and seatbelt.Robjects are never secured with a seat belt ifthe seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupants.Also ensure that there are never objectsbetween a person and the seat, e.g. cush-ions.
Seat belts are only intended to secure andrestrain vehicle occupants. Always observethe notes in the "Stowage options/compart-
ments" section for securing objects, luggageor loads (Y page 254).
Fastening seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 42) and the notes on correct use ofseat belts (Y page 43).
Basic illustrationX Adjust the seat (Y page 96).The seat backrest must be in an almostvertical position.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of belt loop= and engage belt tongue; into beltbuckle:.The seat belt on the driver’s seat and thefront-passenger seat may be tightenedautomatically, see "Belt adjustment"(Y page 45).
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.
In order to attach the child restraint systemsecurely in the vehicle, the seat belt on thefront-passenger seat is equipped with a spe-cial seat belt retractor. Further information onthe "Special seat belt retractor"(Y page 58).
44 Occupant safetySafety
Releasing seat belts
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-aged seat belts can no longer fulfill theirprotective function and must be replaced.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Basic illustrationX Press release button:, hold belttongue; firmly and guide back towardsbelt loop=.
Seat belt adjustmentAMG vehicles: the "seat-belt adjustment"function is not available.The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Thisfunction adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of theoccupants.The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckleandRthe ignition is switched onThe seat-belt adjustment will apply a certainretraction force if any slack is detected
between the vehicle occupant and the seatbelt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightlywhile it is adjusting.You can switch the seat-belt adjustment onand off in the on-board computer(Y page 207).
Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicleoccupants must wear their seat belts. It maylight up continuously or flash. In addition,there may be a warning tone.Regardless of whether the driver's seat belthas already been fastened, the7 seat beltwarning lamp lights up for six seconds eachtime the engine is started. If, aftersix seconds, the driver or front-passengerseat belt has not been fastened and the doorsare closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamplights up. As soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened or a frontdoor is opened again, the 7 seat beltwarning lamp goes out.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened afterthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. This warning tone stops aftersix seconds or when the driver's seat belt isfastened.If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are not fastened, awarning tone sounds. A warning tone alsosounds with increasing intensity for60 seconds or until the driver or frontpassenger have fastened their seat belts.If the driver or front passenger unfasten theirseat belts during the journey, the seat beltwarning is activated again.
i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seatbelts" (Y page 242).
Occupant safety 45
Safety
Z
Air bags
IntroductionThe installation point of an air bag can be rec-ognized by the AIR BAG symbol.An air bag complements the correctly fas-tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seatbelt. The air bag provides additional protec-tion in applicable accident situations.Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.The different air bag systems function inde-pendently from one another (Y page 54).However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injurycaused by an air bag due to the high speed atwhich the air bag must be deployed.
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you do not sit in the correct seat position,the air bag cannot protect as intended andcould even cause additional injury whendeployed. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.To avoid hazardous situations, always makesure that all of the vehicle's occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,including pregnant womenRare sitting correctly andmaintain the great-est possible distance to the air bagsRfollow the following instructionsAlways make sure that there are no objectsbetween the air bag and the vehicle's occu-pants.
RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that theseat is in an almost upright position. Thecenter of the head restraint must supportthe head at about eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passengerseats as far back as possible. The driver'sseat position must allow the vehicle to bedriven safely.
ROnly hold the steering wheel on the out-side. This allows the air bag to be fullydeployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forwards or lean againstthe door or side window. You may other-wise be in the deployment area of the airbags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell infront of the seat. Do not put your feet on thedashboard, for example. Your feet may oth-erwise be in the deployment area of the airbag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraintsystems. Up to this height, the seat beltcannot be worn correctly.
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under twelve yearsof age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall insuitable child restraint systems.ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facingchild restraint system on the front-passenger seat when the front-passengerfront air bag is deactivated. If thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp ispermanently lit, the front-passenger frontair bag is deactivated (Y page 41).RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification Sys-tem (OCS)" (Y page 49) and on "Childrenin the vehicle" (Y page 57) in addition tothe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.
Objects in the vehicle interior may pre-vent an air bag from functioning correctly.Before starting your journey and to avoid risksresulting from the speed of the air bag as itdeploys, make sure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an airbag.Rthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillar.
46 Occupant safetySafety
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploy-ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors or sidewindows.Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objectsare in the pockets of your clothing. Storesuch objects in a suitable place.
G WARNINGIf you modify the air bag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the air bag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an air bag cover or affix objectsto it.
G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyanymore. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.
Front air bags
Driver's air bag: deploys in front of thesteering wheel. Front-passenger front air
bag; deploys in front of and above the glovebox.When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-tional head and thorax protection for theoccupants in the driver's and front-passengerseats.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lampsinform you of the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 41).The front-passenger front air bag will onlydeploy if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sen-sor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied (Y page 49).The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp is lit (Y page 49)Rthe restraint system control unit predicts ahigh accident severity
Knee bags
Driver's knee bag: deploys under the steer-ing column and front-passenger knee bag;under the glove box. The driver's and front-passenger knee bags are triggered togetherwith the front air bags.The driver's and front-passenger knee bagsoffer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro-tection.
Side impact air bags
G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers could restrict or evenprevent the deployment of the air bags inte-
Occupant safety 47
Safety
Z
grated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, the func-tion of the Occupant Classification System(OCS) could be restricted. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.
Side impact air bags: deploy next to theouter bolster of the seat backrest.When deployed, the side impact air bag offersadditional thorax protection. However, it doesnot protect the:RheadRneckRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the side impactair bag is deployed on the side on which theimpact occurs.The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys under the followingconditions:Rthe OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied orRthe belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat
If the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle, the side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate acci-dent situation occurs. In this case, deploy-ment is independent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not.
Head bags
Head bags: deploy in the area of the sidewindows at the front.When deployed, the headbag enhances thelevel of protection for the head. However, itdoes not protect the:RchestRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the headbag isdeployed on the side on which the impactoccurs.If the system determines that they can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, a headbagmay be deployed in otheraccident situations (Y page 54).The headbag on the front-passenger sidedoes not deploy under the following condi-tions:ROCS has detected that the front-passengerseat is unoccupied.Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not fas-tened.
If the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle, the headbag on the front-passengerside deploys if an appropriate accident situa-tion occurs. In this case, deployment is inde-pendent of whether the front-passenger seatis occupied or not.
48 Occupant safetySafety
Occupant Classification System(OCS)
IntroductionThe Occupant Classification System (OCS)categorizes the person in the front-passengerseat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag and front-passengerknee bag are either enabled or deactivated.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe front-passenger head bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
PrerequisitesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin an almost upright position with theirback against the seat backrestRwith their feet resting on the floor, if possi-ble
If the front passenger does not observe theseconditions, OCS may produce a false classi-fication, e.g. because the front passenger:Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-selves on a vehicle armrestRsits in such a way that their weight is raisedfrom the seat cushion
If you install a child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat, be sure to observe thecorrect positioning of the child restraint sys-tem. Never place objects under or behind thechild restraint system, e.g. cushions. Theentire base of the child restraint systemmustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint systemmust lie as flat aspossible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat.The child restraint systemmust not touch theroof or be subjected to a load by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat back-
rest and the head restraint position accord-ingly.Only then can OCS be guaranteed to functioncorrectly. Always observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.
Occupant Classification System opera-tion (OCS)
: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp; PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lampThe indicator lamps inform you whether thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated orenabled.X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice,or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 inthe ignition lock.The system carries out self-diagnostics.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lampsmust light up simultaneously for approx-imately six seconds.The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front air bag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: thefront-passenger front air bag is enabled. If,in the event of an accident, all deploymentcriteria are met, the front-passenger frontair bag is deployed.RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: thefront-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted. It will then not be deployed in the eventof an accident.
Occupant safety 49
Safety
Z
If the status of the front-passenger front airbag changes while the vehicle is in motion, anair bag displaymessage appears in the instru-ment cluster (Y page 223). When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always pay atten-tion to the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON andPASSENGERAIRBAGOFF indicator lamps. Beaware of the status of the front-passengerfront air bag both before and during the jour-ney.
G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag isdisabled. It will not be deployed in the event ofan accident and cannot perform its intendedprotective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, comeinto contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-cially if the person is sitting too close to thedashboard. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible.Rthe person is seated correctly.Make sure, both before and during the jour-ney, that the status of the front-passengerfront air bag is correct.
G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp is lit up, the front-passenger front air bagmay deploy in an accident. The child could bestruck by the air bag. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIRBAGON indicator lamp lights up, do not installa rearward-facing child restraint system onthe front-passenger seat. You can find moreinformation on OCS under "Problemswith theOccupant Classification System"(Y page 53).
G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand you position the front-passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, in the event of anaccident, the child could:Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp is lit, for exampleRbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGERAIR BAG ON is lit up
This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Move the front-passenger seat as far back aspossible. Always make sure that the shoulderbelt strap is correctly routed from the vehiclebelt loop to the shoulder belt guide on thechild restraint system. The shoulder belt strapmust be routed forwards and downwardsfrom the belt loop. Always observe the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructions.
If OCS determines that:Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up after the system self-test andremains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by achild of up to twelve months old, in a stand-ard child restraint system, the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up afterthe system self-test and remains lit. This
50 Occupant safetySafety
indicates that the front-passenger front airbag is deactivated.But even in the case of a twelve-month-oldchild, in a standard child restraint system,the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON can light uppermanently after the system self-test. Thisindicates that the front-passenger front airbag is activated. The result of the classifi-cation is dependent on, among other fac-tors, the child restraint system and thechild's stature. Make sure that the condi-tions for a correct classification are met. Ifthe PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp is still lit, do not install a child restraintsystem on the front-passenger seat.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by aperson of smaller stature (e.g. a teenageror small adult), either the PASSENGER AIRBAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp lights up and remains lit afterthe system self-test depending on theresult of the classification.- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp lights up, move the front-passengerseat as far back as possible.
- If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicatorlamp is lit, a person of smaller statureshould not use the front-passenger seat.
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by anadult or a person of a stature correspond-ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lamp lights up after thesystem self-test and remains lit. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bagis activated.
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sureto observe the notes on "Children in the vehi-cle" (Y page 57).When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6restraint system warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously.The front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted in this case and does not deploy during anaccident. Have the system checked by quali-fied technicians as soon as possible. Consult
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Thefront-passenger seat should only be repairedat an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover orthe seat cushion is damaged, have the nec-essary repair work carried out at an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use seat accessoriesthat have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bagwill also deploy. The Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in thefront-passenger seat. Depending on thatresult, the front-passenger front air bag iseither enabled or deactivated.
System self-test
G DANGERIf both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps donot light up during the system self-test, thesystem is malfunctioning. The front-passenger front air bag might be triggeredunintentionally or might not be triggered at allin the event of an accident with high deceler-ation. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.In this case the front-passenger seat may notbe used. Do not install a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-pant Classification System (OCS) checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
G DANGERIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit after the system self-test, thefront-passenger front air bag is disabled. It willnot be deployed in the event of an accident. Inthis case, the front-passenger front air bagcannot perform its intended protective func-tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-passenger seat.
Occupant safety 51
Safety
Z
That person could, for example, come intocontact with the vehicle's interior, especiallyif the person is sitting too close to the dash-board. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe person is seated properly with a cor-rectly fastened seatbeltRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit when it should not, the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-cation System (OCS) checked and repairedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.
G WARNINGObjects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect OCS oper-ation. This could result in the front-passengerair bag not functioning as intended during anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Do not place any objects between the seatsurface and the child restraint system. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far aspossible, be resting on the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. Always comply with thechild restraint system manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.
After the system self-test, the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON
indicator lamp display the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 49).For more information about the OCS, see"Problems with the Occupant ClassificationSystem" (Y page 53).
52 Occupant safetySafety
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 51).
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp lights up andremains lit, eventhough the front-passenger seat is occu-pied by an adult or aperson of a stature cor-responding to that of anadult.
The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat isincorrect.X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the per-son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 49).
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, thefront-passenger seat may not be used.
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp does not light upand/or does not stayon.The front-passengerseat is:RunoccupiedRoccupied with theweight of a child upto twelve months oldin a child restraintsystem
OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and thechild seat.
X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system restson the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest ofthe forward-facing child restraint systemmust lie as flat as pos-sible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If nec-essary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that theseat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt andthe child restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to thechild restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraintaccordingly.
X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight ontothe seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat.
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
Occupant safety 53
Safety
Z
Deployment of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bags
Important safety notes
G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.
G WARNINGA deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-tection and cannot provide the intended pro-tection in an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-ist workshop in order to have a deployed airbag replaced.
For your own safety and that of your frontpassenger, it is important that you havedeployed air bags replaced and faulty air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the airbags continue to perform their protectivefunction for the vehicle occupants in theevent of a crash.
G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-sioning Devices which have been triggeredimmediately replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.
An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® totrigger the tightening of the seat belt in haz-ardous situations. This procedure is reversi-ble.If Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig-gered or air bags are deployed, you will hear abang, and a small amount of powder may also
be released. The 6 restraint system warn-ing lamp lights up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect yourhearing. The powder that is released gener-ally does not constitute a health hazard, but itmay cause short-term breathing difficulties inpeople with asthma or other respiratory prob-lems. To avoid this, youmay wish to get out ofthe vehicle or open the windows as soon as itis safe to do so.Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension-ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate-rial, which may require special handling andregard for the environment. National guide-lines must be observed during disposal. InCalifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Method of operationDuring the first stage of a collision, therestraint system control unit evaluates impor-tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler-ation or acceleration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRintensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers theEmergency Tensioning Devices during a fron-tal or rear collision.An Emergency Tensioning Device can only betriggered, if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe components of the restraint system areoperational; see "Restraint system warninglamp" (Y page 41)Rthe belt tongue has engaged in the beltbuckle of the respective seat
If the restraint system control unit detects amore severe accident, further components ofthe restraint system are activated independ-
54 Occupant safetySafety
ently of each other in certain frontal collisionsituations:RFront air bags as well as driver's and front-passenger knee bags
The front-passenger front air bag is activatedor deactivated depending on the person onthe front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front air bag can only deploy in anaccident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indi-cator lamp is lit. Observe the information onthe PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps(Y page 41).Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags.During the first deployment stage, the frontair bag is filled with propellant gas to reducethe risk of injuries. The front air bag is fullydeployed with the maximum amount of pro-pellant gas if a second deployment thresholdis reached within a few milliseconds.The activation threshold of the EmergencyTensioning Devices and the air bag are deter-mined by evaluating the rate of vehicle decel-eration or acceleration which occurs at vari-ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. Deployment should takeplace in good time at the start of the collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera-tion and the direction of the force are essen-tially determined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the colli-sionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehi-cleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided
Factorswhich can only be seen andmeasuredafter a collision has occurred do not play adecisive role in the deployment of an air bag.Nor do they provide an indication of air bagdeployment.The vehicle can be deformed considerably,without an air bag being deployed. This is thecase if only parts which are relatively easilydeformed are affected and the rate of decel-eration is not high. Conversely, air bags may
be deployed even though the vehicle suffersonly minor deformation. This is the case if, forexample, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon-gitudinal bodymembers are hit, and sufficientdeceleration occurs as a result.If the restraint system control unit detects aside impact or if the vehicle rolls over, theapplicable components of the restraint sys-tem are activated independently of eachother depending on the apparent type of acci-dent.RSide impact air bag on the side of impact,independently of the Emergency Tension-ing Device and the use of the seat belt onthe driver's seatThe side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys under the followingconditions:- the OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or
- the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat
RHead bag on the side of impact, independ-ently of the use of the seat belt and inde-pendently of whether the front-passengerseat is occupiedREmergency Tensioning Devices, if the sys-tem determines that deployment can offeradditional protection in this situationRHead bags on the driver's and front-passenger side in certain situations whenthe vehicle rolls over, if the system deter-mines that deployment can offer additionalprotection to that provided by the seat belt
i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci-dent. The different air bag systems workindependently of each other.How the air bag system works is deter-mined by the severity of the accident detec-ted, especially the vehicle deceleration oracceleration and the apparent type of acci-dent:Rfrontal collisionRside impactRrollover
Occupant safety 55
Safety
Z
NECK-PRO head restraints
Important safety notes
G WARNINGThe function of the head restraint may beimpaired if you:Rattach objects such as coat hangers to thehead restraints, for exampleRuse head restraint coversIf you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfilltheir intended protective function in the eventof an accident. In addition, objects attachedto the head restraints could endanger othervehicle occupants. There is an increased riskof injury.Do not attach any objects to the headrestraints and do not use head restraint cov-ers.
Method of operationNECK-PRO head restraints reduce the likeli-hood of head and chest injuries. The NECK-PRO head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats are moved forwards andupwards in the event of a rear-end collision ofa certain severity. This provides better headsupport.If the NECK-PRO head restraints have beentriggered in an accident, you must reset theNECK-PRO head restraints on the driver’s andfront-passenger seat (Y page 56). Other-wise, the additional protection will not beavailable in the event of another rear-end col-lision. You can recognize when NECK-PROhead restraints have been triggered by thefact that they have moved forwards and canno longer be adjusted.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe NECK-PRO head restraints checked forfunctionality at a qualified specialist work-shop after a rear-end collision.
Resetting triggered NECK-PRO headrestraints
Do not insert your finger between the uphols-tery of the head restraint and the seat. Payparticular attention while resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints.X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion forwards in the direction ofarrow:.
X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushiondown as far as it will go in the direction ofarrow;.
X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion back in the direction of arrow=until the cushion engages.
X Repeat this procedure for the secondNECK-PRO head restraint.
i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraintsrequires a lot of strength. If you have diffi-culty resetting the NECK-PRO headrestraints, have this work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)
Introduction
PRE-SAFE® is only available in vehicles withthe Driving Assistance package.AMG vehicles: PRE-SAFE® is not available.In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®takes pre-emptive measures to protect thevehicle occupants.
56 Occupant safetySafety
Important safety notes
! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats. There is a dan-ger that the seats and/or objects could bedamaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.
Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE-SAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event ofan accident cannot be ruled out. Alwaysadapt your driving style to suit the prevailingroad and weather conditions and maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in front. Drivecarefully.
Function
PRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. whenBAS is activatedRin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys-ical limits are exceeded and the vehicleundersteers or oversteers severelyRon vehicles with the Driving Assistancepackage: if BAS PLUS intervenes power-fully or the radar sensor system detects animminent danger of collision in certain sit-uations
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detec-ted:Rthe seat belts are pre-tensioned.Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows areclosed so that only a small gap remains.Rvehicles with the memory function: thefront-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in anunfavorable position.Rvehicles with the memory function: thefront-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in anunfavorable position.
If the hazardous situation passes withoutresulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackensthe belt pre-tensioning. All settings made byPRE-SAFE® can then be reversed.
If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:X Move the seat backrest or seat backslightly when the vehicle is stationary.The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced andthe locking mechanism is released.
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Youwill find information on the convenience func-tion under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 45).
Automatic measures after an acci-dentImmediately after an accident, the followingmeasures are implemented, depending onthe type and severity of the impact:Rthe hazard warning lamps are activatedRthe emergency lighting is activatedRthe vehicle doors are unlockedRthe front side windows are loweredRvehicles with a memory function: the elec-trically adjustable steering wheel is raisedRthe engine is switched off and the fuel sup-ply is cut offRvehicles with mbrace: automatic emer-gency call
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notesIf a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles. The child restraint system must beappropriate to the age, weight and size ofthe childRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes in this section in addition to
Children in the vehicle 57
Safety
Z
the child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes on the "Occupant Classifica-tion System (OCS)" (Y page 49)
G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.
G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-ting properly. Particular attention must bepaid to children.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 42) and the notes on correct use ofseat belts (Y page 43).A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height wherea three-point seat belt can be properly fas-tened without a booster seat.
Special seat belt retractor
G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in aportion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannotbe immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivatethe special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.
The seat belt on the front passenger's side isequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat belt retrac-tor ensures that the seat belt cannot slackenonce the child seat is secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Make sure you observe the child restraintsystemmanufacturer's installation instruc-tions.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of the beltloop.
X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.
Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertiareel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is enabled.
X Push the child restraint system down sothat the seat belt is tight and does notloosen.
58 Children in the vehicleSafety
Removing the child restraint system anddeactivating the special seat belt retractor:X Make sure you observe the child restraintsystemmanufacturer's installation instruc-tions.
X Press the release button of the seat beltbuckle, hold the belt tongue and guide itback towards the belt loop.The special seat belt retractor is deactiva-ted.
Child restraint systemThe use of seat belts and child restraint sys-tems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesYou can obtain further information about thecorrect child restraint system from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system isalways resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.
G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or a
sudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
Further information on stowing objects, lug-gage and loads securely can be found under“Stowing options/stowage compartments”(Y page 254).
G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.
The securing system of child restraint sys-tems is the seat belt system.
i If you install a child restraint system onthe front-passenger seat, be sure to readand follow the information on the "Occu-pant Classification System (OCS)"(Y page 49). There you will also find infor-mation on deactivating the front-passengerfront air bag.
All child restraint systems must meet the fol-lowing standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-ards 213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2
Children in the vehicle 59
Safety
Z
Confirmation that the child restraint systemcorresponds to the standards can be foundon an instruction label on the child restraintsystem. This confirmation can also be foundin the installation instructions that are inclu-ded with the child restraint system.Observe thewarning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.
Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat
General notesIf you install a child restraint system onto thefront-passenger seat, always observe theinstructions and safety notes on the "Occu-pant Classification System (OCS)"(Y page 49).You can thus avoid the risks that could ariseas a result of:Ran incorrectly categorized person in thefront-passenger seatRthe unintentional deactivation of the front-passenger front air bagRthe unsuitable positioning of the childrestraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-board
Rearward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a rear-ward-facing child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat, always make sure thatthe front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 41)is the front-passenger front air bag deactiva-ted.Always observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.
Forward-facing child restraint systemIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,always move the front-passenger seat as farback as possible. The entire base of the childrestraint systemmust always rest on the seatcushion of the front-passenger seat. Thebackrest of the child restraint systemmust lieas flat as possible against the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. The child restraint sys-tem must not touch the roof or be subjectedto a load by the head restraint. Adjust theangle of the seat backrest and the headrestraint position accordingly. Always makesure that the shoulder belt strap is correctlyrouted from the front-passenger seat beltloop to the shoulder belt guide on the childrestraint system. The shoulder belt strapmust be routed forwards and downwardsfrom the front-passenger seat belt loop.Always observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.
Pets in the vehicle
G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, therebyendangering other road users
Unsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.
60 Pets in the vehicleSafety
Driving safety systems
Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 61)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 62)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS(distance warning function and AdaptiveBrake Assist) (Y page 62)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 65)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 69)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 69)
Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if youare inattentive, the driving safety systems canneither reduce the risk of an accident noroverride the laws of physics. Driving safetysystems are merely aids designed to assistdriving. You are responsible for maintainingthe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time, and for stay-ing in lane. Always adapt your driving style tosuit the prevailing road and weather condi-tions and maintain a safe distance from thevehicle in front. Drive carefully.The driving safety systems described onlywork as effectively as possible when there isadequate contact between the tires and theroad surface. Please pay special attention tothe notes on tires, recommended minimumtire tread depths, etc. (Y page 308).Inwintry driving conditions, always usewintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snowchains. Only in this way will the driving safetysystems described in this section work aseffectively as possible.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering the vehi-cle when braking.The!ABSwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi-tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, evenwhen you only brake gently.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 61).
G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 243) anddisplay messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 212).
BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.
X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.
Driving safety systems 61
Safety
Z
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-tion of hazardous road conditions, and func-tions as a reminder to take extra care whiledriving.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
General informationBAS operates in emergency braking situa-tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,BAS automatically boosts the braking force,thus shortening the stopping distance.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 61).
G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.
BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS
General informationCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS con-sists of a distance warning function with anautonomous braking function and AdaptiveBrake Assist.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS canhelp you to minimize the risk of a front-end
collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce theeffects of such a collision.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSdetects that there is a risk of a collision, youwill be warned visually and acoustically. If youdo not react to the visual and audible collisionwarning, autonomous braking can be initiatedin critical situations. If you apply the brakeyourself in a critical situation, the COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive BrakeAssist assists you.
Important safety notesIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineRnew vehicles or after a service on the COL-LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS systemObserve the notes in the section on break-ing-in (Y page 138).
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.
Activating or deactivatingCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isactivated after every ignition cycle. You canactivate or deactivate COLLISION PREVEN-TION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board computer(Y page 203). When deactivated, the dis-tance warning function and the autonomousbraking function are also deactivated.
62 Driving safety systemsSafety
If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isdeactivated, theæ symbol appears in theassistance graphics display.
Distance warning function
General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 61).
The distancewarning function can help you tominimize the risk of a front-end collision witha vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of sucha collision.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obsta-cles that are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.If the distance warning function detects thatthere is a risk of a collision, youwill be warnedvisually and acoustically.Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph(7 km/h), the distance warning functionwarns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle infront. An intermittent warning tone will thensound, and the· distance warning lampwill light up in the instrument cluster.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), the distance warning function canalso react to stationary obstacles, such asstopped or parked vehicles.
Important safety notesG WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.
G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and do not rely solely on the distancewarning function.
Detection of hazardous situations can be par-ticularly impaired by:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineRnew vehicles or after a service on the COL-LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS systemObserve the important safety notes in the"Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 138).
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.
orX Take evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.
Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving condi-tions may also cause the system to display awarning.
Driving safety systems 63
Safety
Z
FunctionStarting at a speed of around 4mph (7 km/h),the distance warning function warns you ifyou rapidly approach a vehicle in front. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound,and the· distance warning lamp will lightup in the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.
orX Take evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.
Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving condi-tions may also cause the system to display awarning.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obsta-cles that are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h),the distance warning function can also reactto stationary obstacles, such as stopped orparked vehicles.
Autonomous braking functionIf the driver does not react to the distancewarning signal in a critical situation, COLLI-SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assistwith the autonomous braking function.The autonomous braking function:Rgives the driver more time to react to criti-cal driving situationsRcan help the driver to avoid an accident orRreduces the effects of an accidentIf the autonomous braking function requires aparticularly high braking force, preventativepassenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)are activated simultaneously.
Vehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: theautonomous braking function is available inthe following speed ranges:R4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for movingobjectsR4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationaryobjects
Vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: the auton-omous braking function is available in the fol-lowing speed ranges:R4 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for movingobjectsR4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationaryobjects
Due to the nature of the system, complicatedbut non-critical driving conditions may alsocause the Autonomous Braking function tointervene.
Adaptive Brake Assist
General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 61).
With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, thedistance warning signal can detect obstaclesthat are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of col-lision with the vehicle in front, it calculatesthe braking force necessary to avoid a colli-sion. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adap-tive Brake Assist will automatically increasethe braking force to a level suitable for thetraffic conditions.Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-tance in hazardous situations at speedsabove 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensortechnology to assess the traffic situation.Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph(250 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist is capableof reacting to moving objects that havealready been detected as such at least onceover the period of observation.
64 Driving safety systemsSafety
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist reacts tostationary obstacles.X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicle.
Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
Important safety notesG WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.
G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.
Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving condi-tions may also cause Brake Assist to inter-vene.
If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due toa malfunction in the radar sensor system, thebrake system remains available with fullbrake boosting effect and BAS.Detection of hazardous situations can be par-ticularly impaired by:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineRnew vehicles after the first few kilometersof driving or after the COLLISION PREVEN-TION ASSIST PLUS system has been serv-icedObserve the important safety notes in the"Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 138).
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 61).
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,i.e. power transmission between the tires andthe road surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize thevehicle. The engine output is also modified tokeep the vehicle on the desired course withinphysical limits. ESP® assists the driver when
Driving safety systems 65
Safety
Z
pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.
ETS (Electronic Traction System)
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 61).
ETS traction control is part of ESP®.ETS brakes the drive wheels individually ifthey spin. This enables you to pull away andaccelerate on slippery surfaces, for exampleif the road surface is slippery on one side. Inaddition, more drive torque is transferred tothe wheel or wheels with traction.ETS remains active when you deactivateESP®.
i Mercedes-AMG vehicles: your vehiclemay be equipped with 20-inch tires on therear axle. After changing to 19 inch wheels,ETSmay intervene noticeably earlier duringthe first few kilometers. After approx-imately 10 km ETS will function as usualagain. Information on the dimensions andtypes of wheels and tires for your vehiclecan be found in the "Wheel/tire combina-tions" section (Y page 335).
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.
When towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised, observe the notes on ESP®(Y page 303).ESP® is only deactivated if the å warninglamp is lit continuously.If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warn-ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP® not avail-able due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 245) and display messages whichmay be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 212).
i Only use wheels with the recommendedtire sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.
Characteristics of ESP®
General informationIf the ÷ ESP® warning lamp goes outbefore beginning the journey, ESP® is auto-matically active.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.
ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehiclestops moving. The engine starts automati-callywhen the driverwants to pull away again.ESP® remains in its previously selected sta-tus.Example: if ESP®was deactivated beforethe engine was switched off, ESP® remainsdeactivated when the engine is switched onagain.
Deactivating/activating ESP® (exceptMercedes‑AMG vehicles)
Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 61).
66 Driving safety systemsSafety
You can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.
G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi-cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheelstarts to spin.
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
X To deactivate: press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.
X To activate: press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.
Deactivating/activating ESP®(Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)
Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 61).
You can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RSPORT handling mode is activated.RESP® is deactivated.
G WARNINGWhen SPORT handling mode is activated,there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-dents.Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-uations described in the following.
G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.
Driving safety systems 67
Safety
Z
In the following situations, it may be better toactivate SPORT handling mode or deactivateESP®:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelRon specially designated roads when thevehicle's own oversteering and understeer-ing characteristics are desired
Driving in SPORT handling mode or withoutESP® requires an extremely qualified andexperienced driver.
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi-cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheelstarts to spin.
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
X To activate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster lights up.The SPORT handling mode messageappears in the multifunction display.
X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
X To deactivate ESP®: press button: untilthe å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights upin the instrument cluster.The ÷ OFFmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.
X To activate ESP®: briefly press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The ÷ESP® ONmessage appears in themultifunc-tion display.
Characteristics of activated SPORT han-dling modeIf SPORT handling mode is activated and oneor more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP®warning lamp in the instrument clusterflashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to alimited degree.When SPORT handling mode is activated:RESP® only improves driving stability to alimited degree.Rtraction control is still activated.Rengine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.Rthe engine's torque is restricted only to alimited degree and the drive wheels canspin. The spinning of the wheels results in acutting action, which provides better grip.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.
68 Driving safety systemsSafety
The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.Rtraction control is still activated.RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is itactivated if you brake firmly and ESP®intervenes.RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, itis also not activated if you brake firmly andESP® intervenes.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.
EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)
General informationEBD monitors and controls the brake pres-sure on the rear wheels to improve drivingstability while braking.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 61).
G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 243) as well as dis-play messages (Y page 214).
ADAPTIVE BRAKEi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 61).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand offers increased braking comfort. In addi-
tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVEBRAKEalso has the HOLD function (Y page 179) andhill start assist (Y page 142).
Protection against theft
ImmobilizerX To activate with the SmartKey: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X To activatewith KEYLESS-GO: switch theignition off and open the driver's door.
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.The immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Theengine can be started by anyone with a validSmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be star-ted (yet the vehicle's battery is charged),the system is not operational. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Protection against theft 69
Safety
Z
X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKeyor KEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm sys-tem is armed after approximately15 seconds.
X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe trunk lidRthe hoodRthe glove boxRthe stowage space under the armrestX To turn the alarmoffwith the SmartKey:press the% or& button on theSmartKey.The alarm is switched off.
orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.
X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. The Smart-Key must be outside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.
orX Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-board. The SmartKey must be inside thevehicle.The alarm is switched off.
The alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that triggered it, forexample.
i If the alarm continues for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency callsystem automatically notifies the Cus-tomer Assistance Center. This is doneeither by text message or data connection.The emergency call system sends the mes-sage or data provided that:Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace ser-vice.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.
70 Protection against theftSafety
Useful information .............................. 72SmartKey ............................................. 72Doors .................................................... 78Trunk .................................................... 80Side windows ...................................... 83Roof ...................................................... 86
71
Openingandclosing
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).
SmartKey
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.
G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
! Keep the SmartKey away from strongmagnetic fields. Otherwise, the remotecontrol function could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in thevicinity of powerful electrical installations.
Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can affect the functionality of theSmartKey.
SmartKey functions
: & To lock the vehicle; F To unlock the trunk lid= % To unlock the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press the% but-ton.If you do not open the vehicle withinapproximately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rprotection against theft is reactivated.
X To lock centrally: press the& button.
72 SmartKeyOp
eningandclosing
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe stowage compartment in the centerconsoleRthe fuel filler flapThe turn signals flash once when unlockingand three times when locking.You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated usingthe on-board computer (Y page 206).When it is dark, the surround lighting alsocomes on if it is activated in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 205).
KEYLESS-GO
General notesBear inmind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY-LESS-GO key in the vehicle.
Locking/unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carrythe SmartKey with you. You can combine thefunctions of KEYLESS-GOwith those of a con-ventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle byusing KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock itusing the& button on the SmartKey.When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,the distance between the SmartKey and thecorresponding door handle must not begreater than 3 ft (1 m).A checkwhich periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and theSmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen the external door handles aretouchedRwhen starting the engineRwhile the vehicle is in motion
X To unlock the vehicle: touch the innersurface of the door handle.
X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-face:.
X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface; for an exten-ded period.Further information on the convenienceclosing feature (Y page 85).
X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle onthe trunk lid.The vehicle only unlocks the trunk lid.
Deactivating and activatingIf you do not intend to use a SmartKey for anextended period of time, you can deactivatethe KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey.The SmartKey will then use very little power,thereby conserving battery power. For thepurposes of activation/deactivation, thevehicle must not be nearby.X To deactivate: press the& button onthe SmartKey twice in rapid succession.The battery check lamp (Y page 75) of theSmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights uponce, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated.
X To activate: press any button on theSmartKey or insert the SmartKey into theignition lock.KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated fea-tures are available again.
SmartKey 73
Openingandclosing
Z
Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the lockingsystem. Thismeans only the driver's door, thelockable stowage compartments in the vehi-cle interior and the fuel filler flap are unlockedwhen the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful ifyou frequently travel on your own.X To change the setting: press and holddown the% and& buttons simulta-neously for about six seconds until the bat-tery indicator lamp flashes twice(Y page 75).i If the setting of the locking system ischanged within the signal range of the vehi-cle, pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock: press the% button once.X To unlock centrally: press the% but-ton twice.
X To lock centrally: press the& button.
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-lows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch theinner surface of the door handle on thedriver's door.
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur-face of the front-passenger door handle.
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles.
X To restore the factory settings: pressand hold down the% and& buttonssimultaneously for approximately six sec-onds until the battery check lamp flashestwice (Y page 75).
Mechanical key
General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey, use themechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door or the trunk lid, theanti-theft alarm system will be triggered(Y page 69).There are several ways to turn off the alarm:X To deactivate the alarm with the key:press the% or& button on the key.
orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-GO: press the Start/Stop button in the igni-tion lock. The SmartKey must be in thevehicle.
orX Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey must be outside thevehicle.
If you unlock the vehicle using themechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlockedautomatically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.
Removing the mechanical key
74 SmartKeyOp
eningandclosing
X Push release catch: in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time removemechanical key; from the SmartKey.
For further information about:Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 80)Runlocking the trunk (Y page 82)Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 80)
Inserting the mechanical key
X Push mechanical key; completely intothe SmartKey until it engages and releasecatch: is back in its basic position.Push mechanical key; completely intothe SmartKey until it engages and therelease catch is back in its basic position.
SmartKey battery
Important safety notes
G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe batteries replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. Nationalguidelines must be observed during disposal.In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/Hazard-ousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Checking the battery
X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.
X Change the battery (Y page 75).If the SmartKey battery is checked within thesignal reception range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle
i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-cialist workshop.
Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 74).
SmartKey 75
Openingandclosing
Z
X Pressmechanical key; into the SmartKeyopening in the direction of the arrow untilbattery compartment cover: opens. Donot hold battery compartment cover:closed while doing so.
X Remove battery compartment cover:.
X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free clothto do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contaminants.
X Insert the front tabs of battery compart-ment cover: into the housing and thenpress to close it.
X Insert mechanical key; into the Smart-Key (Y page 74).
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.
76 SmartKeyOp
eningandclosing
Problems with the SmartKey
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 75) and replace it if nec-essary (Y page 75).
If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using themechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using themechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing KEYLESS-GO.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function ofthe SmartKey. To do this, hold the key as close as possible to thevehicle and press the% or& button.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remotecontrol function:X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using themechanical key.
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function ofthe SmartKey.
X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remotecontrol function:X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using themechanical key.
X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You have lost a Smart-Key.
X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work-shop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost themechanical key.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
SmartKey 77
Openingandclosing
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.
the on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 298).
orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 299).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot bestarted using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey is inthe vehicle.
The vehicle is locked.X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Doors
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.
Unlocking and opening doors fromthe inside! The side windows will not open/close ifthe battery is discharged or if the side win-dows have iced up. It will then not be pos-sible to close the door. Do not attempt toforce the door closed. You could otherwisedamage the door or the side window.
You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked.If the vehicle was previously locked with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening thevehicle from the inside will activate the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm(Y page 69).
78 DoorsOp
eningandclosing
X Pull door handle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: popsup. The door is unlocked and can beopened.
i When a door is opened, the side windowon that side opens slightly. When the dooris closed, the side window closes again.
Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. For example, you can unlockthe front-passenger door from the inside orlock the vehicle before you pull away.
X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If the front-passenger door is closed, thevehicle locks.
The central locking/unlocking button doesnot lock or unlock the fuel filler flap or thestowage compartment in the center console.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally fromthe inside if the vehicle has been locked withthe SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked.If a locked door is opened from the inside, theprevious unlock status of the vehicle will betaken into consideration if:Rthe vehicle was locked using the lockingbutton for the central locking, orRif the vehicle was locked automaticallyThe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had pre-viously been fully unlocked. If only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked, only thedoor which has been opened from the insideis unlocked.
Automatic locking feature
: Deactivating; ActivatingX To deactivate: press and hold button:for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X To activate: press and hold button; forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.
If you press one of the two buttons and do nothear a tone, the relevant setting has alreadybeen selected.The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels areturning.
Doors 79
Openingandclosing
Z
You could therefore lock yourself out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the on-board com-puter (Y page 206).
Unlocking the driver's door (mechan-ical key)If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 69).X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 74).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.
X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseas far as it will go to position1.The door is unlocked.
X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.
X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key (Y page 74).
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with theSmartKey, use the mechanical key.
X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door and thetrunk lid.
X Press the locking button (Y page 79).X Check whether the locking knob on thefront-passenger door is still visible. Pressthe locking knob down by hand, if neces-sary.
X Close the driver's door.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 74).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.
1 To lockX Turn themechanical key clockwise as far asit will go to position1.
X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.
X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lidare locked.
X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key (Y page 74).
If you lock the vehicle as described above, thefuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theftalarm system is not armed.
Trunk
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
80 TrunkOp
eningandclosing
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.
! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
! Only close the trunk once the roof is low-ered completely. Otherwise, you coulddamage the roof.If you close the trunk lid before the roof islowered completely, the loading aid switchlights up and a warning tone sounds.
i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid(Y page 352).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. Youcould otherwise lock yourself out.The trunk lid can be:Ropened/closed from outsideRopened automatically from outsideRlocked separatelyRunlocked with the mechanical keyRopened with the emergency release button
Opening/closing from outside
Opening
X Press the% button on the key.X Pull handle:.X Raise the trunk lid.
Closing
X Pull the trunk lid down using recess:.X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the&button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the trunk,the trunk lid cannot be locked and will openagain.
Opening automatically from outside
General notes
! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid(Y page 352).
OpeningYou can open the trunk lid automaticallyusing the handle in the trunk lid.X If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lidhandle and let it go again immediately.
Trunk 81
Openingandclosing
Z
Vehicles with the trunk lid remote closing fea-ture: the trunk lid can be also be openedautomatically using the SmartKey.X Press and hold theF button on the keyuntil the trunk lid opens.
Locking the trunk separatelyYou can lock the trunk separately. If you thenunlock the vehicle centrally, the trunkremains locked and cannot be opened.X Close the trunk lid.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 74).
1 Basic position2 To lockX Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as it will go.
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise fromposition1 to position2.
X Remove the mechanical key.X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey(Y page 74).
Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
If the trunk cannot be unlocked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechani-cal key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm systemwill be triggered (Y page 69).X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 74).
X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as it will go.
1 Basic position2 To unlockX Turn the mechanical key from position1counter-clockwise as far as it will go toposition2.
X Pull the trunk lid handle.The trunk is unlocked.
X Turn the mechanical key back to position1 and remove it.
X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey(Y page 74).
Trunk emergency releaseYou can unlock the trunk lid from the insidewith the emergency release button.
82 TrunkOp
eningandclosing
X Press emergency release button: briefly.The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunklid emergency release when the vehicle isstationary or while driving.The trunk lid emergency release does notunlock the trunk lid if the battery is discon-nected or discharged.Trunk lid emergency release light:Remergency release button: flashes for30 minutes after the trunk lid is openedRemergency release button: flashes for60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed
Side windows
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.
G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.
G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Side window reversing featureThe front side windows are equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts one of the front side win-dows from traveling upwards during the auto-matic closing process, the sidewindow opensagain automatically. During the manual clos-ing process, the side window only opensagain automatically after the correspondingswitch is released. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing a side window.
G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRwhile resettingThis means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.
Opening and closing the side win-dows in the frontThe switches for the front side windows arelocated on the driver's door. There is also aswitch for the front-passenger side windowon the front-passenger door.The switches on the driver's door take prec-edence.
Side windows 83
Openingandclosing
Z
: Left; RightX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.
X To openmanually: press and hold the cor-responding switch.
X To open fully: press the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.
X To closemanually: pull the correspondingswitch and hold it.
X To close fully: pull the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.
X To interrupt automatic operation: pressor pull the corresponding switch again.
You can continue to operate the sidewindowsafter you switch off the engine. This functionis available for up to five minutes or until thedriver's or front-passenger door is opened.
Opening and closing all side windows
Using the switch on the center consoleYou can use the switch on the center consoleto close all side windows simultaneously.X Open the cover in the lower center console.The switch for all side windows is under thecover.
X To open all side windows: press but-ton: to the point of resistance.
X To open all side windows fully: pressswitch: beyond the point of resistance.All side windows open simultaneously.i If, after opening the windows, you thenclose a side window using the switch on thedoor control panel, the other side windowswill remain open. To close the other sidewindows, you must pull the switch on thecenter console and hold it. The front sidewindow will close first, then the rear sidewindows.
X To close all side windows: pull switch:.The rear side windows close after the frontside windows.
X Make sure that all the side windows arefully closed.
When the roof is open, only the two front sidewindows can be operated using the switch onthe center console.
Using the SmartKey
G WARNINGWhen using the convenience closing feature,parts of the body could be trapped in the clos-ing area when a side window is being closed.There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.
84 Side windowsOp
eningandclosing
If someone is trapped:X Release the& button immediately.X Press and hold the% button until theside windows open again.
You can use the SmartKey to open or close allside windows simultaneously.X Close the roof (Y page 87).X Open the trunk partition (Y page 88).X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.
X To open all sidewindows: press the%button on the key until the side windowsare fully opened.
X To interrupt the opening procedure:release the% button.
X To close all sidewindows: press the&button on the key until the side windowsare fully closed.
X To interrupt the closing procedure:release the& button.
Convenience closing with KEYLESS-GO
G WARNINGWhen using the convenience closing feature,parts of the body could be trapped in the clos-ing area when a side window is being closed.There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.
If someone is trapped:X Release the recessed sensor surface on thedoor handle immediately.
X Pull the door handle immediately and holdit until the side windows open again.
With KEYLESS-GO you can close all side win-dows simultaneously. The KEYLESS-GO keymust be outside the vehicle. All the doorsmust be closed.
X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows are fullyclosed.i Make sure you only touch recessed sen-sor surface:.
X Make sure that all the side windows areclosed.
X To interrupt convenience closing:release recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle.
Resetting the side windowsIf a side window can no longer be closed fully,you must reset it.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.
X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window is com-pletely closed (Y page 83).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switchon the door control panel until the side win-dow is completely closed (Y page 83).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the respective side window remainsclosed after the button is released, then ithas been set correctly. If this is not thecase, repeat the steps above again.
Side windows 85
Openingandclosing
Z
Problems with the side windows
G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side windowcloses with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
A side window cannotbe closed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.
X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.
A side window cannotbe closed and you can-not see the cause.
If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.
Roof
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you do not fully open/close the soft top, thesoft-top hydraulics depressurize after a shorttime. This causes the soft top to lower unex-pectedly and may cause you or others to betrapped. There is a risk of injury.Always open or close the soft top completely.
G WARNINGClosing the roof manually is a complicatedand technically demanding procedure, whichrequires a lot of strength. You or others canbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Only have the soft top closed manually at aqualified specialist workshop.
! Never sit on the rear shelf or store heavyobjects there. You will otherwise damagethe roof and the rear shelf of your vehicle.
! Do not forget that the weather canchange abruptly. Make certain that the roofis closed when you leave the vehicle. Thevehicle electronics can be damaged ifwater enters the vehicle interior.
! When opening and closing the roof, makesure that:
86 RoofOp
eningandclosing
Rthere is sufficient clearance, as the roofswings upwards.Rthere is sufficient clearance behind thevehicle, as the trunk lid swings back-wards beyond the bumper.Rthe trunk is only loaded to below thetrunk partition.Rthe trunk partition is not pushed up bythe load.Rthe trunk partition is closed.Rthe trunk lid is closed.Rthe outside temperature is above 5 ‡(Ò15 †).
You could otherwise damage the roof,trunk and other parts of the vehicle.
i Vehicle dimensions when opening/clos-ing the roof (Y page 352).
i Make sure that the roof and rear windoware clean and dry before opening the roof.Otherwise, water or dirt could enter thevehicle interior or trunk.
Opening and closing using the roofswitch
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roof, body partscould be trapped by, for example, the roofmechanism, trunk lid or side windows. Thereis a risk of injury.When raising or lowering the roof, make surethat no body parts are in the vicinity of movingcomponents. If someone becomes trapped,release the button.
Opening and closing
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 160).
X Close the trunk partition (Y page 89).X Close the trunk lid.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.
X Open the cover in the lower center console.Roof switch: is located under the cover.
X To open: pull roof switch: until the entireroof is stowed away in the trunk.You see the Vario-Roof in Operationmessage in the multifunction display. Oncethe opening procedure is complete, themessage disappears and a tone will sound.All of the side windows open.
X To close: press and hold soft-top switch:until the soft top is fully closed.You see the Vario-Roof in Operationmessage in the multifunction display. Oncethe opening procedure is complete, themessage disappears and a tone will sound.All of the side windows open.
X To close all side windows, pull the switchunder the cover of the center console(Y page 84).
If you operate the roof switch and the TrunkPartition Open message appears in themultifunction display, the trunk partition hasnot been closed correctly.
Roof 87
Openingandclosing
Z
Opening and closing using the Smart-Key
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roof, body partscould be trapped by, for example, the roofmechanism, trunk lid or side windows. Thereis a risk of injury.When raising or lowering the roof, make surethat no body parts are in the vicinity of movingcomponents. If someone becomes trapped,release the button.
Opening and closingX Close the trunk partition (Y page 88).X Close the trunk lid (Y page 80).X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.
X To open: press and hold the% buttonon the key until the roof is fully opened.The roof and the rear side windows open.The front side windows close.
X To interrupt the opening procedure:release the% button.
X To open the front side windows: pressthe% button on the key again.
X To close: press and hold the& buttonon the key until the roof is fully closed.The roof and the side windows close.
X To interrupt the closing procedure:release the& button.
When the roof is closed and the trunk parti-tion is open, the roof cannot be opened usingthe SmartKey functions. Instead, all of theside windows open or close simultaneously(Y page 84). Additionally, the Trunk Parti‐tion Open message appears in the multi-function display.
Locking the roof again
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you do not fully open/close the soft top, thesoft-top hydraulics depressurize after a shorttime. This causes the soft top to lower unex-pectedly and may cause you or others to betrapped. There is a risk of injury.Always open or close the soft top completely.
The roof is not locked if:RtheK symbol and the Vario-Roof inOperation message appear in the multi-function displayRtheK symbol and the Open/CloseVario-Roof Completely messageappear and you hear a warning tone.Ryou hear a warning tone for up to 10 sec-onds when pulling away or while driving.
LockingYou can lock the roof again if it is not lockedfully.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soonas possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.
X Press the roof switch (Y page 87).
Trunk partition
General notes
! To avoid damaging the roof or luggagewhen folding back the roof, you should:Ronly load the trunk to below the trunkpartitionRnot place any objects on or in front of thetrunk partition
88 RoofOp
eningandclosing
Rnot place any objects on the coverbehind the roll barsRnot allow the cargo to push the trunkpartition upwards
The trunk partition can be used to cover lug-gage and loads in the trunk.
Opening and closing
X To close: pull back trunk partition: bythe handle in the direction of the arrow untilit engages on both sides in the eyelets onthe cargo compartment lip.
X To open: grip the handle of trunk parti-tion:.
X Press the release button in the handle oftrunk partition:.Trunk partition: is unlocked.
X Pull trunk partition: up out of the eyeletson the cargo compartment lip.
X Push trunk partition: forwards againstthe direction of the arrow by handle.
Wind screen
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you use the wind screen in darkness or inother conditions offering poor visibility, yourview to the rear is further impaired. There is arisk of an accident.Only use the wind screen when visibility con-ditions are good.
G WARNINGIf the wind screen is incorrectly installed, itcould detach itself during a journey andendanger other road users. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.Install the wind screen as described.
! Install or remove the wind screen onlywhen the roof is open. You could otherwisedamage thewind screen or the vehicle inte-rior.
The wind screen offers protection from thewind when driving with the roof down.The wind screen can be installed or removedfrom the driver's side or passenger side.For operations involving the wind screen, it ispreferable to be positioned on the side of thevehicle facing away from the traffic, afterstopping the vehicle in accordance with thetraffic conditions.
Installing and removing thewind screen
Preparing for installation
Preparing for installation from the left side of thevehicle (example): Wind screen; Locked latch= Unlocked latchX The following conditions must be fulfilledfor installation:
Roof 89
Openingandclosing
Z
Runlocking buttons R and L point in thedirection of travel.Rlatch= facing you is unlocked.Rlatch; facing away from you is locked.
X To unlock the latch: press unlocking but-ton R or L on the locked latch.
X To lock the latch: push the unlocked latchupwards by hand until it engages.
Installing
Installation from the left side of the vehicle (exam-ple)X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X Take the wind screen out of the trunk.X Prepare for installing (Y page 89).X Hold wind screen: at an angle and slide itwith locked latch; in the direction ofarrow? into the bracket of the oppositeroll bar.
X Press wind screen: on the side of thevehicle facing you downwards in the direc-tion of arrowA until it engages.Make sure that studsB and latch= fitinto the respective brackets.
X Check whether wind screen: is fullyinserted into all four brackets and is sittingsecurely.
X If this is not the case, remove windscreen: again and repeat the stepsabove.
Removing
Removing from the left side of the vehicle (exam-ple)X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X Press unlocking button L:. Meanwhile,pull wind screen; on the side of the vehi-cle facing you upwards and tilt it.
Removing from the left side of the vehicle (exam-ple)X Pull wind screen; out of the bracket ofthe opposite roll bar in the direction of thearrow.
X Secure wind screen; to the trunk floor bythe rubber strips (Y page 256).
AIRGUIDE
Important safety notes
G WARNINGYou could lose control of the vehicle if you foldAIRGUIDE in/out while the vehicle is inmotion. There is a risk of an accident.
90 RoofOp
eningandclosing
Only fold AIRGUIDE in/out while the vehicle isstationary.
! AIRGUIDE can only be positioned cor-rectly by folding it in or out. AIRGUIDE can-not be dismantled. Do not try to removeAIRGUIDE from its anchorage. Otherwise,you could damage AIRGUIDE or the vehicle.
AIRGUIDE can be folded out or back in fromthe driver's side or passenger side.When operating AIRGUIDE, preferably standon the side of the vehicle away from the traf-fic, after you have stopped the vehicle inaccordance with road and traffic conditions.
Operating AIRGUIDE
Example: folding out from the left side of the vehi-cleX Stop the vehicle, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X To fold out AIRGUIDE: turn disc: in thedirection of the arrow towards themiddle ofthe vehicle to the stop.
X Repeat with disc;.X To fold in AIRGUIDE: turn discs: and;back behind the roll bar to the stop.
i Discs: and; can also be used inde-pendently of each other, e.g. when you aredriving without a passenger.
MAGIC SKY CONTROL
General notesMAGIC SKY CONTROL is a glass roof, thetransparency of which can be changed byapplying electrical voltage.MAGIC SKY CONTROL can be switchedbetween darkened and transparent states.MAGIC SKY CONTROL darkens automaticallywhen you turn the key to position 0 in theignition lock or remove the key.
Risk of electric shock
G DANGERMAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using highvoltage. If the trim behind the overhead con-trol panel is damaged or removed, electricalcomponents will be exposed. If you touchthese components, you could get an electricshock. There is a risk of fatal injury.RNever remove the trim behind the overheadcontrol panel.RIf the trim is damaged, never touch theelectrical components behind it.RAlways have work on the MAGIC SKY CON-TROL carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.
The electrical components of MAGIC SKYCONTROL are protected by a paneling behindthe overhead control panel.The MAGIC SKY CONTROL control unit ismarked with a yellow warning sticker thatwarns you of high voltage. The electric cablesof the vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemare orange in color.
Roof 91
Openingandclosing
Z
Operating MAGIC SKY CONTROL
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.MAGIC SKY CONTROL switches to the sta-tus it was set to before the engine wasswitched off.
X To change the degree of transparency:press button:.
At sub-zero temperatures, the change isslower and uneven. The entire process maytake some time.
92 RoofOp
eningandclosing
Problems with the roof
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
The roofwill not open orclose.
The trunk partition is not closed and not properly engaged.X Close the trunk partition (Y page 89).
The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid (Y page 81).
The on-board voltage is too low.X Leave the engine running.
The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. Theroof drive has been automatically deactivated.You can open and close the roof again after approximately tenminutes.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.
The automatic roof mechanism is faulty.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Roof 93
Openingandclosing
Z
94
Useful information .............................. 96Correct driver's seat position ............ 96Seats .................................................... 97Steering wheel .................................. 100Mirrors ............................................... 103Memory function ............................... 106
95
Seats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).
Correct driver's seat position
G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.
X Observe the safety guidelines on seatadjustment (Y page 97).
X Make sure that seat= is adjusted prop-erly.Manual seat adjustment (Y page 98)Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 98)
When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bagas possibleRyou are sitting in a normal upright positionRyou can fasten the seat belt properlyRyou have moved the backrest to an almostvertical positionRyou have set the seat cushion angle so thatyour thighs are gently supportedRyou can depress the pedals properlyX Check whether the head restraint is adjus-ted properly.When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level by thecenter of the head restraint.
X Observe the safety notes on steering col-umn adjustment (Y page 100).
X Make sure that steering wheel: is adjus-ted properly.Adjusting the steering wheel man-ually(Y page 101)Adjusting the steering wheel electrically(Y page 101)
When adjusting the steering wheel column,make sure that:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bentRyou can move your legs freelyRyou can see all the displays in the instru-ment cluster clearly
X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 42).
X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt; properly (Y page 44).
96 Correct driver's seat positionSeats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of your shoul-derRbe routed in your pelvic area across the hipjoints
X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmir-ror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 103) insuch a way that you have a good view ofroad and traffic conditions.
X Vehicles with a memory function: savethe seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrorsettings (Y page 106).
Seats
Important safety notes
G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The seats can still be adjusted when there isno SmartKey in the ignition lock.
G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 46) and "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 57).
G WARNINGIf the driver's seat is not engaged, it couldmove unexpectedly while the vehicle is inmotion. This could cause you to lose control ofthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Always make sure that the driver's seat isengaged before starting the vehicle.
G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get under thelever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-tem.
G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.
G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seat
Seats 97
Seats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
Z
heating should also not be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see the "Interior care" section.Rdo not transport heavy loads on theseats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating mate-rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov-ers, child seats or booster seats.
! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmoving the seats back. There is a risk thatthe seats and/or the objects could be dam-aged.
i The head restraints are equipped with theNECK-PRO system (Y page 56). For thisreason, it is not possible to remove thehead restraints from the seats.For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
Adjusting the seats manually
X To set seat fore-and-aft adjustment: liftlever: and slide the seat forwards orbackwards.
X Release lever: again.Make sure that you hear the seat engage inposition.
X To adjust the backrest angle: relieve thepressure on the backrest.
X Pull handle; and adjust the backrest tothe desired angle.
X Release handle; again.The backrest must audibly engage.
X To adjust the seat height: pull handle=upwards or push it down repeatedly untilthe seat has reached the desired height.
Adjusting the seats electrically
: Backrest angle; Seat fore-and-aft adjustment= Seat cushion angle? Seat height
i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 106).
Adjusting the head restraints
G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.
98 SeatsSeats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
X To raise/lower: push the head restraintupwards or pull it down into the desiredposition.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contourYou can adjust the contour of the seat backr-ests individually to provide optimum supportfor your back.
Switching the seat heating on/off
Switching on/off
G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-
tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.
Driver's and front-passenger seat
The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximatelyeight minutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 20 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.
Seats 99
Seats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
Z
Problems with the seat heatingThe seat heating has switched off prema-turely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle'selectrical system voltage is too low becausetoo many electrical consumers are switchedon.X Switch off electrical consumers that you donot need, such as the rear windowdefroster or interior lighting.
X Once the battery is sufficiently charged,switch on the seat heating again.
AIRSCARF
Switching on/off
G WARNINGWhen AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot aircan flow from the vents in the head restraints.This could result in burns in the immediatevicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.Reduce the heater output before it becomestoo hot.
The AIRSCARF function warms the head andneck area of vehicle occupants with warm air.Thewarmair flows out of the holes in the headrestraints.The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.
X To switch on: press button:.Three red indicator lamps in the button lightup. The blower starts up after a preheatingphase of seven seconds.
X Press button: repeatedly until thedesired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.
i The blower continues running for sevenseconds to cool down the heating ele-ments.
i If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARFmay switch off.
Problems with AIRSCARFAIRSCARF has switched off prematurely orwill not switch on. The vehicle's electrical sys-tem voltage is too low because too manyelectrical consumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you donot need, such as the rear windowdefroster or interior lighting.
X Switch on AIRSCARF again.
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.
100 Steering wheelSeats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The electrically adjustable steering wheel canstill be adjusted when there is no SmartKey inthe ignition lock.
Adjusting the steering wheel man-ually
G WARNINGIf the steering wheel is unlocked while thevehicle is in motion, it could change positionunexpectedly. This could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Before starting off, make sure the steeringwheel is locked. Never unlock the steeringwheel while the vehicle is in motion.
: Release lever; To adjust the steering wheel height= To adjust the steering wheel position
(fore-and-aft adjustment)X Push release lever: down completely inthe direction of the arrow.The steering column is unlocked.
X Adjust the steering wheel to the desiredposition.
X Push release lever: up completely.The steering column is locked.
X Check if the steering column is locked.When doing so, try to push the steeringwheel up or down or try to move it in thefore-and-aft direction.
Adjusting the steering wheel electri-cally
: To adjust the steering wheel height; To adjust the steering wheel position
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature(Y page 101)RStoring settings (Y page 106)
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.
G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicle
Steering wheel 101
Seats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
Z
occupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving.
The adjustment process is stopped.
G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel and the driver's seat, youand other vehicle occupants – particularlychildren – could become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the seat andthe steering wheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRpress one of the memory function memorybuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving
The adjustment process is stopped.
G WARNINGIf you use openings in the bodywork ordetachable parts as steps, you could:Rslip and/or fallRdamage the vehicle and cause yourself tofall.
There is a risk of injury.Always use secure climbing aids, e.g. a suita-ble ladder.
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes gettingin and out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board com-puter (Y page 206).
Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel swings upwards whenyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO inposition 1Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey isin position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock
i The steering wheel only moves upwards ifit has not already reached the upper endstop.
Position of the steering wheel for driv-ingThe steering wheel is moved to the last selec-ted position when:Rthe driver's door is closedRyou insert the SmartKey into the ignitionlockorRyou press the Start/Stop button once onvehicles with KEYLESS-GO
When you close the driver's door with theignition switched on, the steering wheel isalso automatically moved to the previouslyset position.The last position of the steering wheel isstored when you switch off the ignition orwhen you store the setting with the memoryfunction (Y page 106).
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature istriggered in an accident, the steering columnwill move upwards when the driver's door isopened. This occurs irrespective of the posi-
102 Steering wheelSeats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
tion of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Thismakes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescuethe occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature isonly operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-ture is activated in the on-board computer(Y page 206).
Mirrors
Rear-view mirror
X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever:forwards or back.
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.
G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X Press button: for the left-hand exteriormirror or button; for the right-hand exte-rior mirror.The indicator lamp in the correspondingbutton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button= as longas the indicator lamp is lit.
X Press adjustment button= up, down, tothe right or to the left.The exteriormirrormust be set to a positionthat provides you with a good overview oftraffic conditions.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.The exterior mirrors are automatically heatedafter starting the vehicle if the rear windowdefroster is switched on and the outside tem-perature is low. Mirror heating lasts up to 10minutes.
i You can also heat up the exterior mirrorsmanually by switching on the rear windowdefroster.
Mirrors 103
Seats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
Z
Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X Briefly press button:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyIf the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer(Y page 207):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the out-side.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat-ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle andthen open the driver's or front-passengerdoor.
i The exterior mirrors do not fold out if theyhave been folded in manually.
Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically foldingexterior mirrors:move the exterior mirrorinto the correct position manually.
X Vehicles with electrically folding exte-rior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding
button: until you hear a click and then themirrors engage in position (Y page 104).The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 103).
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
G WARNINGElectrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-matic anti-glaremirror breaks. The electrolyteis harmful and causes irritation. It must notcome into contact with your skin, eyes, res-piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the electrolyte,observe the following:RRinse off the electrolyte from your skinimmediately with water.RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out ofyour eyes thoroughly with clean water.RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do notinduce vomiting.RIf electrolyte comes into contact with yourskin or hair or is swallowed, seek medicalattention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with electrolyte.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glaremode if the following conditions aremetsimultaneously:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes thesensor in the rear-view mirror.
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or if the interior light-ing is switched on.
104 MirrorsSeats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking position
Using reverse gear
You can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. You can store this posi-tion.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.
X Press button; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.
X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.
X Use adjustment button= to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving posi-tion.
Using the memory button
You can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. This setting can bestored using memory button M?.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.
X With the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side activated, use adjustmentbutton= to adjust the exterior mirror. Inthe exterior mirror, the rear wheel and thecurb should be visible.
X Press memory buttonM? and one of thearrows on adjustment button= withinthree seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthe steps.
Calling up a stored parking position set-ting
Mirrors 105
Seats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
Z
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button;.
X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rif you press button: for the exterior mir-ror on the driver's side
Memory function
Storing settings
G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.
G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.
G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Thememory function can be used at any time,e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the igni-tion lock.With the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for three dif-ferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRdriver's side: steering wheel positionRdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-rors on the driver's and front-passengersides
X Adjust the seat electrically (Y page 98).X On the driver's side, adjust the steeringwheel (Y page 101) and the exteriormirrors(Y page 103).
X Press memory button M and one of thestorage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 withinthree seconds.The settings are stored in the selected pre-set position. A tone sounds when the set-tings have been completed.
Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the relevant storage posi-tion button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steeringwheel and exterior mirrors are in the storedposition.i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the storage positionbutton.
106 Memory functionSeats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
Useful information ............................ 108Exterior lighting ................................ 108Interior lighting ................................. 113Replacing bulbs ................................. 114Windshield wipers ............................ 117
107
Lightsandwindshieldwipers
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).
Exterior lighting
General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switchedon even during the daytime. In some coun-tries, operation of the headlamps varies dueto legal requirements and self-imposed obli-gations.
Setting the exterior lighting
Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 110)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 205)
Light switch
Operation
1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-
led by the light sensor5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB R Rear fog lampIf you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toÃ.The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey inposition 0
Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.
108 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers
The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.Ã is the favored light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selected accord-ing to the brightness of the ambient light(exception: poor visibility due to weather con-ditions such as fog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:the parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.RWith the engine running: if you have acti-vated the daytime running lamps functionvia the on-board computer, the daytimerunning lamps or the parking lamps and thelow-beamheadlamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.
X To switch on automatic headlampmode: turn the light switch toÃ.
Only for Canada:The daytime running lamps improve the visi-bility of your vehicle during the day. The day-time running lamps function is required by lawinCanada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if youmove the selector lever froma drive position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in bright ambient light: if youturn the light switch to T, the daytimerunning lamps and parking lamps switch on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings takeprecedence over the daytime running lamps.USA only:The daytime running lamps improve the visi-bility of your vehicle during the day. To do this,the daytime running lamps function must beswitched on using the on-board computer(Y page 205).
If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.
Low-beam headlampsG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.
Even if the light sensor does not detect that itis dark, the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps switch on when the ignition isswitched on and the light switch is set to theL position. This is a particularly usefulfunction in the event of rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L.The greenL indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.
Rear fog lampThe rear fog lamp improves visibility of yourvehicle for the traffic behind in the event ofthick fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear foglamps.X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn theSmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lockor start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.
X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.
Exterior lighting 109
Lightsandwindshieldwipers
Z
Parking lamps! If the battery has been excessively dis-charged, the parking lamps or standinglamps are automatically switched off toenable the next engine start. Always parkyour vehicle safely and sufficiently litaccording to legal standards. Avoid thecontinuous use of the T parking lampsfor several hours. If possible, switch on theX right or the W left standing lamp.
X To switch on: turn the light switch toT.The greenT indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.
Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illumina-ted.X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is inposition 0.
X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).
Combination switch
Turn signal
: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, left
X To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.
X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow; or?.
High-beam headlampsX To switch on manually: turn the Smart-Key to position 2 in the ignition lock or startthe engine.
X Vehicles without Adaptive HighbeamAssist: turn the light switch to L orÃ.
X Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:turn the light switch to L.
X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theà position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched on when it is darkand the engine is running.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.
X To deactivate: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.
Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, itautomatically controls activation of the high-beam headlamps (Y page 112).
High-beam flasherX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in theignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start theengine.
X Pull the combination switch in the directionof arrow=.
110 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers
Hazard warning lamps
X To switch on the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch on aturn signal using the combination switch,only the turn signal lamp on the corre-sponding side of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch off the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.
The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployed orRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from aspeed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a standstill
The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-matically if the vehicle reaches a speed ofabove 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a fullbrake application.
i The hazard warning lamps still operate ifthe ignition is switched off.
Cornering light function
The cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better vis-ibility in tight bends, for example. The corner-ing light function can only be activated whenthe low-beam headlamps are switched on.Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal orturn the steering wheelRif you are driving at speeds between25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)and turn the steering wheel
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off afterno more than three minutes.
Active light function
The active light function is a system thatmoves the headlamps according to the steer-ing movements of the front wheels. In thisway, relevant areas remain illuminated while
Exterior lighting 111
Lightsandwindshieldwipers
Z
driving. This allows you to identify pedes-trians, cyclists and animals.Active: when the lights are switched on.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
General notes
You can use this function to set the head-lamps to change between low beam and highbeam automatically. The system recognizesvehicles with their lights on, either approach-ing from the opposite direction or traveling infront of your vehicle, and consequentlyswitches the headlamps from high beam tolow beam.The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on the dis-tance to the other vehicle. Once the systemno longer detects any other vehicles, it reac-tivates the high-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead controlpanel.
Important safety notes
G WARNINGAdaptive HighbeamAssist does not recognizeroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assistmay fail to recognize other road users thathave lights, or may recognize them too late. Inthis or similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated oractivated regardless. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. Youare responsible for adjusting the vehicle'slighting to the prevailing light, visibility andtraffic conditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe restricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRdirt on the sensors or the sensors areobscured
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assiston/offX To switch on: turn the light switch toÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-tion display lights up when it is dark and thelight sensor activates the low-beam head-lamps.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h):
112 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers
The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between thevehicle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no otherroad users have been detected:The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds below approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other roadusers have been detected or the roads areadequately lit:The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster goes out. The _indicator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.
X To switch off: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position or movethe light switch to another position.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-tion display goes out.
Headlamps fogged up on the insideCertain climatic and physical conditions maycause moisture to form in the headlamp. Thismoisture does not affect the functionality ofthe headlamp.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand reading lamp
on/off; | Switches the automatic interior
lighting control on/off= p Switches the right-hand reading
lamp on/off? c Switches the interior lighting on/off
Interior lighting control
General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeunless the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.The color and brightness of the ambient light-ing may be set using the on-board computer(Y page 205).
Automatic interior lighting controlX To activate/deactivate: press the |button.When the automatic interior lighting con-trol is activated, the button is flush with theoverhead control panel.
Interior lighting 113
Lightsandwindshieldwipers
Z
The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockThe interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from the igni-tion lock. You can activate this delayedswitch-off using the on-board computer(Y page 206).
Manual interior lighting controlX To switch the interior lighting on/off:press the c button.
X To switch the reading lamps on/off:press the p button.
Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsiveemergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.
orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using theSmartKey.
Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes
Xenon bulbs
G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can getan electric shock if you remove the cover ofthe Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con-tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.Never touch the parts or the electrical con-tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work onthe Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,you can recognize this by the following: thecone of light from the Xenon bulbs movesfrom the top to the bottom and back againwhen you start the engine. For this to beobserved, the lights must be switched onbefore starting the engine.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Other bulbs
G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.
Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or ifits glass tube has been scratched.The bulb may explode if:Ryou touch itRit is hotRyou drop itRyou scratch itOnly operate bulbs in enclosed lampsdesigned for that purpose. Only install sparebulbs of the same type and the specified volt-age.Marks on the glass tube reduce the servicelife of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tubewith your bare hands. If necessary, clean theglass tubewhen coldwith alcohol or spirit andrub it off with a lint-free cloth.Protect bulbs from moisture during opera-tion. Do not allow bulbs to come into contactwith liquids.There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbsthat you cannot replace. Replace only thebulbs listed (Y page 115). Have the bulbs thatyou cannot replace yourself changed at aqualified specialist workshop.
114 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers
If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-sult a qualified specialist workshop.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types
Halogen headlamps: Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W= Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
Bi-Xenon headlamps: Cornering lamp: H7 55 W
Tail lamp: Backup lamp: W 16 W
Changing the front bulbs
Removing/mounting the cover in thefront wheel housing
X To remove: switch off the lights.X Turn the front wheels inwards.X Slide cover: up and remove it.X To install: insert cover: again and slidedown until it engages.
Replacing bulbs 115
Lightsandwindshieldwipers
Z
Low-beam headlamps (halogen head-lamps)
X Remove the cover in the front wheel hous-ing (Y page 115).
X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.
X Press retainer; up.X Remove connector= with the bulb.X Pull the bulb out of connector=.X Insert the new bulb into connector= andinto bracket for retainer;.Make sure the bulb is positioned correctly.
X Press retainer; down.X Attach housing cover: and turn it clock-wise until it engages.
X Replace the cover in the front wheel hous-ing (Y page 115).
High-beam headlamps (halogen head-lamps)/cornering lamps (Bi-Xenonheadlamps)
X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.
X At the bulb holder, push the bulb upwards,disconnect it and pull it out of bulbholder;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;,push it down and secure it in place.
X Attach housing cover: and turn it clock-wise until it engages.
Side marker lamps (halogen head-lamps)Due to their location, have the bulbs in theside marker lamp changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
Turn signals (halogen headlamps)
X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn bulb holder: counter-clockwise andpull it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder:.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder:.X Insert bulb holder: and turn it clockwiseuntil it engages.
116 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers
Changing the rear bulbs
Backup Light
X Switch off the lights.X Make sure that the roof is closed.X Open the trunk.X Turn and pull out buffer stop;.X Unclip catch: for side paneling=.
X Reach upwards into side paneling=,loosen and pull downwards until holder?of the backup lamp is easily accessible.
X Pull out bulb holder?.X Pull out the bulb.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder?.X Insert holder? until it engages.X re-install side paneling= precisely.X Clip in catch: for side paneling=.X Push in and tighten buffer stop;.
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wiperson/off! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield canscratch the glass if wiping takes placewhenthe windshield is dry.If it is necessary to switch on thewindshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, alwaysuse washer fluid when operating the wind-shield wipers.
! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, wax orother residues may be the reason for this.Clean the windshield using washer fluidafter washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: dueto optical influences and the windshieldbecoming dirty in dry weather conditions,the windshield wipers may be activatedinadvertently. This could then damage thewindshield wiper blades or scratch thewindshield.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.
Combination switch1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor
set to low sensitivity)
Windshield wipers 117
Lightsandwindshieldwipers
Z
3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensorset to high sensitivity)
4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe/î Wipes the wind-
shield using washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the corre-sponding position.
In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automatically accord-ing to the intensity of the rain. In the Åposition, the rain sensor is more sensitivethan in the Ä position, causing the wind-shield wiper to wipe more frequently.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshieldwill no longer be wiped properly. This couldprevent you from observing the traffic condi-tions.
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.
! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield.Never fold awindshieldwiper armwithout awiper blade back onto the windshield.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe windshield wiper arm without a wiperblade and it falls onto the windshield, the
windshield may be damaged by the force ofthe impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
! Always position the windshield wiperarms vertically before folding them awayfrom the windshield. By doing so, you willavoid damage to the hood.
Replacing the wiper blades
Removing the wiper bladesX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 139).
X Set the windshield wiper to position °.X When the wiper arms have reached the ver-tical position, turn the SmartKey to position0 and remove it from the ignition lock(Y page 139).
X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield.
X Press both release clips;.X Fold wiper blade: in the direction ofarrow= away from wiper arm?.
X Remove wiper blade: in the direction ofarrowA.
118 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers
Installing the wiper blades
X Position newwiper blade:with recessBon lugA.
X Fold wiper blade: in the direction ofarrow= onto the wiper arm, until retainingclips; engage in bracket?.
X Make sure that wiper blade: is seatedcorrectly.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-shield.
Windshield wipers 119
Lightsandwindshieldwipers
Z
Problems with the windshield wipers
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
The windshield wipersare jammed.
Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshieldwiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from theignition lock.
orX Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipersfail completely.
The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.
The windshield washerfluid from the spraynozzles no longer hitsthe center of the wind-shield.
The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work-shop.
120 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers
Useful information ............................ 122Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 122Operating the climate control sys-tems ................................................... 127Setting the air vents ......................... 134
121
Climatecontrol
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).
Overview of climate control systems
General notesObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows could other-wise fog up.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode onlybrieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-cation functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperatureand the humidity in the vehicle interior andfilters undesirable substances out of the air.Climate control can only be operated whenthe engine is running. Optimum operation isonly achieved with the side windows and roofclosed.The residual heat function can only be acti-vated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off (Y page 133).
i When the weather is warm, ventilate thevehicle for a brief period. This will speed upthe cooling process and the desired vehicleinterior temperature will be reached morequickly.
i The integrated filter filters out most par-ticles of dust and soot and completely fil-ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol-lutants and odors. A clogged filter reducesthe amount of air supplied to the vehicleinterior. For this reason, you should alwaysobserve the interval for replacing the filter,which is specified in the MaintenanceBooklet. As it depends on environmentalconditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, theinterval may be shorter than stated in theMaintenance Booklet.
122 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol
Air-conditioning system control panel
Canada only: Sets the temperature (Y page 129); Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 133)= Sets the air distribution (Y page 130)? Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131)A Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)B Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 133)C Sets the airflow (Y page 130)D Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 132)
USA only: Sets the temperature (Y page 129); Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 131)
Overview of climate control systems 123
Climatecontrol
= Sets the air distribution (Y page 130)? Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131)A Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)B Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 133)C Sets the airflow (Y page 130)D Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 132)
Notes on using the air-conditioningsystem
Air-conditioning systemBelow, you can find a number of notes andrecommendations to help you use the air-conditioning system optimally.RSwitch on cooling with air dehumidificationusing the¿ button. The indicator lampin the¿ button lights up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).R Recommendation for air distribution inwinter: set theO and¯ settings.Recommendation for air distribution insummer: set theP setting.ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control system only operates at areduced capacity. If you require full climatecontrol capacity, the ECO start/stop functioncan be deactivated by pressing the ECO but-ton (Y page 145).
124 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
Canada only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 129); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 130)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)
Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 133)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 132)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 129)C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 133)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 130)E Increases the airflow (Y page 130)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 130)G Activates/deactivates the air conditioning (Y page 127)H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 129)
Overview of climate control systems 125
Climatecontrol
USA only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 129); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131)= Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 131)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 132)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 129)C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 133)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 130)E Increases the airflow (Y page 130)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 130)G Activates/deactivates the air conditioning (Y page 127)H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 129)
Optimum use of 3-zone automatic cli-mate control
Automatic climate controlThe following contains instructions and rec-ommendations to enable you to get the mostout of your automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using theà and¿ buttons or theÁ button on thecontrol panel of the climate control. Theindicator lamps in theà and¿ but-tons or theÁ button light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-perature settings on the driver's side forthe front-passenger side as well. The indi-cator lamp in theá button goes out.RUse the residual heat function if youwant toheat or ventilate the vehicle interior whenthe ignition is switched off. The residual
126 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol
heat function can only be activated or deac-tivated with the ignition switched off.
ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control only operates at a reduced capa-city. If you require full climate control capa-city, the ECO start/stop function can bedeactivated by pressing the ECO button(Y page 145).
Operating the climate control sys-tems
Activating/deactivating climate con-trol
General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, theair supply and air circulation are alsoswitched off. The windows could fog up.Therefore, switch off climate control onlybriefly
i Activate climate control primarily usingtheà button (Y page 129).
Air-conditioning systemX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
X To switch on: turn airflow controlCclockwise to the desired position (exceptposition 0) (Y page 123).
X To switch off: turn airflow controlCcounter-clockwise to position 0(Y page 123).
Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
X To switch on: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.
orX Press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.
X To switch off: press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button lightsup.
Switching cooling with air dehumidi-fication on/off
General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica-tion function only briefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-tion is only available when the engine is run-ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled anddehumidified according to the temperatureselected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-tion.
Operating the climate control systems 127
Climatecontrol
Activating or deactivatingX To activate: press the¿ orÁ but-ton.The indicator lamp in the¿ orÁbutton lights up.
X To deactivate: press the¿ orÁbutton.The indicator lamp in the¿ orÁbutton goes out. The "Coolingwith air dehu-midification" function has a delayed switch-off feature.
128 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
The indicator lamp inthe¿ orÁ but-ton flashes three timesor remains off. The"Cooling with air dehu-midification" functioncannot be switched on.
Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to amalfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Setting climate control to automatic
General notesAutomatic mode is only available with dual-zone automatic air conditioning.In automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained automatically at a constant level.The system automatically regulates the tem-perature of the dispensed air, the airflow andthe air distribution.The automatic mode functions optimallywhen the "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is activated. If necessary, coolingwith air dehumidification can be deactivated.If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica-tion function only briefly.
Automatic controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airfloware activated.
X To switch to manual mode: press the_ button.
orX Press theI orK button.The indicator lamp in theà button goesout.
Setting the temperature
Air-conditioning systemX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
X To increase or reduce: turn control:clockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 123).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).i If you turn control: counter-clockwiseto the lowest temperature setting, air-recir-culation mode may activate automatically,depending on the outside temperature.
Dual-zone automatic climate controlDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
X To increase or decrease: turn control:orB clockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 125).
Operating the climate control systems 129
Climatecontrol
Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).i If you turn controls: andB counter-clockwise to the lowest temperature set-ting, air-recirculation mode may activateautomatically, depending on the outsidetemperature.
Setting the air distribution
Air-conditioning systemX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
X Press one or more of theP,O,¯buttons.The corresponding indicator lamp lights upbriefly.
The following air distribution settings can beselected:¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsO Directs air through the footwell air
ventsP Directs air through the center and side
air vents
i You can also activate several air distribu-tion settings simultaneously. To do this,press multiple air distribution buttons. Theair is then directed through various vents.
Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
X Press the_ button repeatedly until thedesired symbol appears in the display.
The following air distribution settings can beselected:P Directs air through the center and side
air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air
ventsS Directs air through the center, side and
footwell vents
¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsb Directs the airflow through the
defroster, center and side air vents(Canada only)
a Directs air through the defroster andfootwell vents
_ Directs the airflow through thedefroster vents, the center and side airvents as well as the footwell air vents(Canada only)
i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the sideair vents. You can only close the side airvents, by fully closing the adjuster on theside air vents (Y page 135).
Setting the airflow
Air-conditioning systemX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
X To increase or reduce: turn controlCclockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 123).
Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
X To increase or reduce: press theK orI button.
Switching the ZONE function on/offThis function is only available with dual-zoneautomatic climate control on vehicles forCanada.X To switch on: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button lightsup. The temperature setting for the driver's
130 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol
side is not adopted for the front-passengerside.
X To switch off: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button goesout. The temperature setting for the driv-er's side is adopted for the front-passengerside.
Defrosting the windshield
General notesYou can use this function to defrost the wind-shield or to defrost the inside of the wind-shield and the side windows.Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion as soon as the windshield is clear again.
Switching the "windshield defrosting"function on or offX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
X To switch on: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield andfront side windowsRair-recirculation mode off
X To switch off: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.
orX Dual-zone automatic climate control: presstheà button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.
MAX COOL maximum coolingThe MAX COOL function is only available invehicles for the USA.MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.X To activate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
X To deactivate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in the button goes out.The previously selected settings arerestored.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate con-trol switches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode on
Defrosting the windows
Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the¿ orÁ cooling with airdehumidification function.
X Dual-zone automatic air conditioning: acti-vate theà mode button.
X If the windows continue to fog up, activatethe¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.
Windows fogged up on the outsideX Activate the windshield wipers.X Air-conditioning system: press theP orO button.
X Dual-zone automatic air conditioning:press the_ button until theP orO symbol appears in the display.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.
Operating the climate control systems 131
Climatecontrol
Rear window defroster
General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,the rear window defroster switches off auto-matically after several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-dow defroster may switch off.
Activating or deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
X Press the¤ button.The indicator lamp in the¤ button lightsup or goes out.
132 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol
Problems with the rear window defroster
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
The indicator lamp onthe¤ buttonflashes. The rear win-dow defroster hasdeactivated prema-turely or cannot be acti-vated.
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-sumers are switched on.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. readinglamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear windowdefroster can be activated again.
The roof is open.X Close the roof.When the roof is closed, the rear window defroster can be acti-vated again.
Switching air-recirculation modeon/off
General notesIf you switch on air-recirculation mode, thewindows can fog up more quickly, in particu-lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu-lation mode briefly to prevent the windowsfrom fogging up.
Activating or deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
X To activate: press theg button.The indicator lamp in theg button lightsup.i Air-recirculation mode is automaticallyactivated at high levels of pollution (dual-zone automatic climate control only) or athigh outside temperatures. When air-recir-culation mode is activated automatically,the indicator lamp in theg button is notlit. Outside air is added after about30 minutes.
X To deactivate: press theg button.The indicator lamp in theg button goesout.
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-matically:Rafter approximately five minutes at out-side temperatures below approximately41 ‡ (5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if cool-ing with air dehumidification is deactiva-tedRafter approximately 30 minutes at out-side temperatures above approximately41 ‡ (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehu-midification" function is activated
Switching the residual heat on or off
General notesThe residual heat function is only available onvehicles for Canada.It is possible to make use of the residual heatof the engine to continue heating the station-ary vehicle for up to 30 minutesafter theengine has been switched off. The heatingtime depends on the set interior temperature.
Operating the climate control systems 133
Climatecontrol
Activating or deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock or remove it (Y page 139).
X To activate: press theÌ orÁ but-ton.The indicator lamp in theÌ orÁbutton lights up.i The blower will run at a low speed regard-less of the airflow setting.
i If you activate the residual heat functionat high temperatures, only the ventilationwill be activated. The blower runs atmedium speed.
X To deactivate: press theÌ orÁbutton.The indicator lamp in theÌ orÁbutton goes out.
Residual heat is deactivated automatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage drops
Setting the air vents
Important safety notes
G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.
G WARNINGWhen AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot aircan flow from the vents in the head restraints.This could result in burns in the immediatevicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.Reduce the heater output before it becomestoo hot.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood and inthe engine compartment on the front-passenger side free of blockages, such asice, snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grillesin the vehicle interior.
i You can move the adjusters for the airvents vertically or horizontally to set thedirection of the airflow.
i For optimal climate control in the vehicle,open the air vents completely and set theadjusters to the central position.
Setting the center air vents
X To open the center air vents: turn theadjuster in one of center air vents: coun-ter-clockwise.
X To close the center air vents: turn theadjuster in one of center air vents: clock-wise until it engages.
134 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol
Setting the side air vents
: Side window defroster vent; Side air ventX To open a side air vent: turn the adjusterin the side air vent; to the left.
X To close a side air vent: turn the adjusterin the side air vent; to the right until itengages.
Setting the blower output of the AIR-SCARF vents
G WARNINGWhen AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot aircan flow from the vents in the head restraints.This could result in burns in the immediatevicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.Reduce the heater output before it becomestoo hot.
You can adjust the blower output of AIR-SCARF vents: using the AIRSCARF button(Y page 100).
Setting the air vents 135
Climatecontrol
Z
136
Useful information ............................ 138Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 138Driving ............................................... 139Automatic transmission ................... 148Refueling ............................................ 158Parking ............................................... 160Driving tips ........................................ 163Driving systems ................................ 168
137
Drivingandparking
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
Important safety notesThe sensor system of some driving and driv-ing safety systems adjusts automaticallywhile a certain distance is being driven afterthe vehicle has been delivered or afterrepairs. Full system effectiveness is notreached until the end of this teach-in proce-dure.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after sev-eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-sate for this by applying greater force to thebrake pedal.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehi-cle and engine speeds for the first1,000 miles (1,500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt-tle, during this period.RChange gear in good time, before the tach-ometer needle isÔ of the way to the redarea of the tachometer.
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear tobrake the vehicle.RTry to avoid depressing the acceleratorpedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-down).RIdeally, for the first 1,000miles (1,500 km),drive in program C.
After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you canincrease the engine speed gradually and bringthe vehicle to full speed.Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMG vehicles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph(140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RChange gear in good time.You should also observe these notes onbreaking in if the engine or parts of the drivetrain on your vehicle have been replaced.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed.
Self-locking rear axle differential(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Your vehicle is equipped with a self-lockingdifferential on the rear axle.Change the oil to improve protection of therear axle differential:Rafter a breaking-in period of 1,850 miles(3,000 km)Revery 31,000 miles (50,000 km) or3 years
These oil changes prolong the service life ofthe differential. Have the oil change carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.
138 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicleDrivingandparking
Driving
Important safety notes
G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.
G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.
G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.
! Do not warm up the engine with the vehi-cle stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoidhigh engine speeds and driving at full throt-tle until the engine has reached its operat-ing temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission tothe desired drive position when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engineoil temperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), themaximum engine speed is restricted inorder to protect the engine. To protect theengine and maintain smooth engine oper-ation, avoid driving at full throttle when theengine is cold.
SmartKey positions
SmartKey
g To remove the SmartKeyShift the transmission to position P.
1 Power supply for some consumers, suchas the windshield wipers
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)and drive position
3 To start the engine
i The SmartKey can be turned in the igni-tion lock even if it is not the correct Smart-Key for the vehicle. The ignition is notswitched on. The engine cannot be started.
Driving 139
Drivingandparking
Z
KEYLESS-GO
General notesVehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped witha SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO start function and a detachable Start/Stop button.The Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in theignition lock and the SmartKey must be in thevehicle.When you insert the Start/Stop button intothe ignition lock, the system needs approx-imately two seconds recognition time. Youcan then use the Start/Stop button.Pressing the Start/Stop button several timesin succession corresponds to the differentkey positions in the ignition lock. This is onlythe case if you are not depressing the brakepedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-ately.A checkwhich periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and theSmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example,when starting the engine.To start the vehicle without actively using theSmartKey:Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted inthe ignition lock.Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.Rthe vehicle must not be locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 73).
Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can impair the functionality of the KEY-LESS-GO key.
If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey'sremote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after ashort time:Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignitionwith the Start/Stop button.Ryou will not be able to start the engine withthe Start/Stop button until the vehicle isunlocked again.
i The engine can be switched off while thevehicle is in motion by pressing and holdingthe Start/Stop button for three seconds.This function operates independently of theECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function.
Key positions with KEYLESS-GO
: Start/Stop button; Ignition lockAs soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. Further information on situations wherean indicator lamp either fails to go out afterstarting the engine or lights up while driving(Y page 243).If Start/Stop button: has not yet beenpressed, this corresponds to the key beingremoved from the ignition.X To switch on the power supply: pressStart/Stop button: once.The power supply is switched on. You cannow activate the windshield wipers, forexample.If you then open the driver's door when inthis position, the power supply is deactiva-ted.
140 DrivingDrivingandparking
X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button: twice.The ignition is switched on.If you press Start/Stop button: oncewhen in this position, the ignition isswitched off again.
Removing the Start/Stop button
You can remove the Start/Stop button fromthe ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor-mal using the SmartKey.X RemoveStart/Stop button: from ignitionlock;.
i You do not have to remove the Start/Stopbutton from the ignition lock when youleave the vehicle. You should, however,always take the SmartKey with you whenleaving the vehicle. As long as the Smart-Key is in the vehicle:Rthe vehicle can be started using theStart/Stop buttonRthe electrically powered equipment canbe operated
Starting the engine
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.
G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.
G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.
! Do not depress the accelerator whenstarting the engine.
Driving 141
Drivingandparking
Z
i Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the exhaustflap of the exhaust system is checked aftereach cold start. A resulting noise can beheard during this process.
i During a cold start, the engine runs athigher speeds to enable the catalytic con-verter to reach its operating temperature.The sound of the enginemay change duringthis time.
Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P.The transmission position display in themultifunction display shows P.
i You can start the engine in transmissionposition P and N.
Starting procedure with the SmartKeyTo start the engine using the SmartKeyinstead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stopbutton out of the ignition lock.X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-tion lock and release it as soon as theengine is running (Y page 139).
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engineThe Start/Stop button can be used to startthe vehicle manually without inserting theSmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignitionlock and the SmartKeymust be in the vehicle.This mode for starting the engine operatesindependently of the ECO start/stop auto-matic engine start function.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.
X Press the Start/Stop button once(Y page 140).The engine starts.
Pulling away
General notes
G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.
! Change gear in good time and avoid spin-ning the wheels. You could otherwise dam-age the vehicle.
Depress the accelerator carefully when pull-ing away.The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature (Y page 206).It is only possible to shift the transmissionfrom position P to the desired position if youdepress the brake pedal. Only then is the shiftlock released.
i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.
Information on the automatic release of theelectric parking brake (Y page 161).
Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. Itholds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland to depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.
142 DrivingDrivingandparking
G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.
Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on adownhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe electric parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.
ECO start/stop function
IntroductionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stop-ped under certain conditions.The engine starts automatically when thedriver wants to pull away again. The ECOstart/stop function thereby helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissionsof your vehicle.
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.
General notes
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles)
: ECO start/stop displayThe ECO start/stop function is activatedwhenever you switch on the engine using theSmartKey or the Start/Stop button.If the engine has been switched off automat-ically by the ECO start/stop function, theè ECO symbol is shown in the multifunc-tion display.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
: ECO start/stop displayThe ECO start/stop function is activatedwhenever you switch on the engine using theSmartKey or the Start/Stop button.If theè ECO symbol is shown in green inthe multifunction display, the ECO start/stopfunction switches the engine off automati-cally if the vehicle stops moving.If the ECO start/stop function has been man-ually deactivated (Y page 145) or a malfunc-tion has caused the system to be deactivated,theè ECO symbol is not displayed.The ECO start/stop function is only availablein drive program C.
i If automatic cylinder shut-off is active indrive program C, then 4, the number ofactive cylinders, is also shown in theè
Driving 143
Drivingandparking
Z
ECO symbol. This means that the engine isoperating with four cylinders.If cylinder shut-off is not active, the enginewill operate with all eight cylinders. In thiscase, 8, the number of active cylinders, isshown in theè ECO symbol.
Automatic engine switch-off
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles)If the vehicle is braked to a standstill inD orN,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operationalwhen:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the system.Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-ature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield isnot fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.
i All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine is stopped automatically.
i Automatic engine switch-off can takeplace a maximum of four times in a row(initial stop, then three subsequent stops)..
i The HOLD function can be activated if theengine has been switched off automati-cally. It is then not necessary to continueapplying the brakes during the automaticstop phase. When you depress the accel-erator pedal, the engine starts automati-cally and the braking effect of the HOLDfunction is deactivated.
Mercedes-AMG vehiclesIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill inD orN,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operationaland theè ECO symbol is displayed ingreen in the multifunction display, if:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the system.Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-ature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield isnot fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.
If the conditions for automatic engine switch-off are not all fulfilled, theè ECO symbol islit yellow.
i All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine is stopped automatically.
i The engine can be automatically switchedoff an unlimited number of times.
i The HOLD function can be activated if theengine has been switched off automati-cally. It is then not necessary to continueapplying the brakes during the automaticstop phase. When you depress the accel-erator pedal, the engine starts automati-cally and the braking effect of the HOLDfunction is deactivated.
144 DrivingDrivingandparking
Automatic engine start
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles)The engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO buttonRin transmission position D or N the brakepedal is released and the HOLD function isnot activeRyou depress the accelerator pedalRyou engage reverse gear RRyou move the transmission out of positionPRyou unfasten your seat belt or open thedriver's doorRthe vehicle starts to rollRthe brake system requires thisRthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set rangeRthe system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched onRthe battery's condition of charge is too low
i Shifting the transmission to position Pdoes not start the engine.
Mercedes-AMG vehiclesThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO buttonRin transmission position D or N the brakepedal is released and the HOLD function isnot activeRyou depress the accelerator pedalRyou engage reverse gear RRyou move the transmission out of positionPRyou switch to drive program S or MRyou unfasten your seat belt or open thedriver's doorRthe vehicle starts to rollRthe brake system requires this
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set rangeRthe system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched onRthe battery's condition of charge is too low
i Shifting the transmission to position Pdoes not start the engine.
i If you shift the transmission from R to D,the ECO start/stop function is availableagain once theè ECO symbol reap-pears in green in the multifunction display.
Deactivating or activating the ECOstart/stop function
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles)
X To switch off: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; goes out.
X To switch on: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.
i If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated man-ually or as the result of a malfunction. Theengine will then not be switched off auto-matically when the vehicle stops.
i The ECO start/stop function is activatedeach time the engine is switched on.
Driving 145
Drivingandparking
Z
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
X To switch off: in drive program C, pressECO button:.
orX Switch to drive program S or M(Y page 152).Indicator lamp; and theè ECO sym-bol in the multifunction display go out.
X To switch on: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. If drive pro-gram S orM is active, the automatic trans-mission switches to drive program C.If all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 144) are fulfilled, theè ECO symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display.If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 144) are fulfilled, theè ECO symbol is shown in yellow in themultifunction display.If this is the case, the ECO start/stop func-tion is not available.Conditions for the automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 144).
i If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated man-ually or as the result of a malfunction. Theengine will then not be switched off auto-matically when the vehicle stops.
i Each time the engine is started, the ECOstart/stop function switches to the status(on or off) that was selected before switch-ing off the engine.
146 DrivingDrivingandparking
Problems with the engine
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
The engine does notstart.
The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 179) or DISTRONICPLUS (Y page 170).
X Try to start the engine again.
The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.
RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.Before attempting to start the engine again:X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock.orX Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lampsin the instrument cluster go out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 141). Avoid excessivelylong and frequent attempts to start the engine as thesewill drainthe battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.
The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 299).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The startermotor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately twominutes.
X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine is not run-ning smoothly and ismisfiring.
There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-verter and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.
Driving 147
Drivingandparking
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
The coolant tempera-ture gauge shows avalue above 248 ‡(120 †). The coolantwarning lamp may alsobe on and a warningtone may sound.
The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 279). Observe the warningnotes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fanmay be faulty.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.
Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.
G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.
Selector lever
Gearshift overview (7G-TRONIC)
j Park position with selector lever lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive
Gearshift overview (9G-TRONIC)
! If the engine speed is too high or if thevehicle is rolling, do not shift the transmis-sion directly from D to R, from R to D ordirectly to P.Do not open the driver's door while thevehicle is in motion. At low speeds in trans-
148 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking
mission position D or R, park position P isotherwise engaged automatically.The transmission could be damaged.
j Park positionk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveThe selector lever always returns to its origi-nal position. The current transmission posi-tion P, R, N or D appears in the transmissionposition display in the multifunction display.
Transmission position and drive pro-gram display
: Transmission position display; Drive program displayThe current position of the selector lever isshown by the indicators next to the selectorlever.The indicators light up when the SmartKey isinserted into the ignition lock. The indicatorsgo out when the SmartKey is removed fromthe ignition lock.
Engaging park position P (9G-TRONIC)X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.
X Press the P button in the center console.
i Park position P is disengaged if you:Rdepress the brake pedal andRpush the selector lever forwards or backto the first point of resistance
The transmission shifts to neutral N.Park position P is engaged automatically andthe electric parking brake applied:Rif you remove the SmartKey from the igni-tion lockRif you switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's or front-passenger doorRif you open the driver's door while travelingat low speed in transmission position D orR
Under certain conditions, the automatictransmission shifts automatically to transmis-sion position P if the HOLD function orDISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Observe theinformation on the HOLD function(Y page 180) and on DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 173).
Engaging reverse gear R (9G-TRONIC)
! Only shift the automatic transmission toRwhen the vehicle is stationary.
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.
X Push the selector lever forwards past thefirst point of resistance.
The ECO start/stop function is not availablewhen reverse gear is engaged. Further infor-mation on the ECO start/stop function(Y page 143).
Automatic transmission 149
Drivingandparking
Z
Engaging neutral N (9G-TRONIC)X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.
X Push the selector lever forwards or back tothe first point of resistance.
Staying in neutral N (9G-TRONIC)
G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.
Using the SmartKey:RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.RShift to neutral N.RRelease the brake pedal.RIf the electric parking brake is engaged,release it.RSwitch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.
With KEYLESS-GO:RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.REngage park position P.
RRelease the brake pedal.RRemove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock.RInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.RSwitch on the ignition.RDepress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.RShift to neutral N.RRelease the brake pedal.RIf the electric parking brake is engaged,release it.RSwitch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.
Engaging transmission position D (9G-TRONIC)X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.
X Push the selector lever back past the firstpoint of resistance.
150 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking
Transmission positions
B Park positionOnly shift the transmission intoposition P when the vehicle is sta-tionary (Y page 148). The parkinglock should not be used as a brakewhen parking. Always apply theelectronic parking brake in addi-tion to the parking lock in order tosecure the vehicle.7G-TRONIC: the key can only beremoved if the transmission is inposition P. If the SmartKey isremoved from the ignition lock, theselector lever is locked.7G-TRONIC: in the event of a mal-function of the vehicle's electron-ics, the selector lever may lock inposition P. Information on man-ually releasing the parking lock(Y page 157).9G-TRONIC: if the key is removedfrom the ignition lock, the trans-mission is locked.9G-TRONIC: the automatic trans-mission shifts into P automatically,Rwhen the SmartKey is removedfrom the ignition lockRwhen the engine is switched offwith the transmission in positionR or D and one of the doors isopened
9G-TRONIC: in the event of a mal-function of the vehicle's electron-ics, the transmission may lock inposition P. Have the vehicle elec-tronics checked immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.
C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission intoposition R when the vehicle is sta-tionary.
A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be dam-aged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brake pedal will allowyou to move the vehicle freely, e.g.to push it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:shift the transmission only to posi-tion N if the vehicle is in danger ofskidding, e.g. on icy roads.
! Rolling in neutralN can damagethe drive train.
7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.
Driving tips
Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. This automatic gear shift-ing behavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive program (Y page 152)Rthe position of the accelerator pedal(Y page 151)Rthe road speed
Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts
Automatic transmission 151
Drivingandparking
Z
Double-clutch functionWhen shifting down, the double-clutch func-tion is active regardless of the currently selec-ted drive program. The double-clutch functionreduces load change reactions and is condu-cive to a sporty driving style. The sound gen-erated by the double-clutch function dependson the drive program selected.
KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Program selector button
General notes
Example: program selector button
The program selector button allows you tochoose between different driving character-istics.X Press program selector button: repeat-edly until the letter for the desired driveprogram appears in the multifunction dis-play.
On Mercedes-AMG vehicles, drive program Eis called drive program C.
E EconomyC ControlledEfficiency
Comfortable, economicaldriving
S Sport Sporty driving style
M Manual Manual gear shifting
i The automatic transmission switches toautomatic drive program E (drive programC in Mercedes-AMG vehicles).
i Mercedes-AMG vehicles: when in driveprogram C and under low load, the engineoperates on just four cylinders. This is thecase in city traffic or on a country road, forexample. This reduces fuel consumption.Cylinder shut-off is inactive in drive pro-grams S and M, so that the engine willoperate with all eight cylinders.
i Further information about permanentdrive program M (Y page 155).As well as this permanent drive programM,you can also activate temporary drive pro-gram M (Y page 153).
i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 153).
Steering wheel paddle shifters
: Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter; Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifterIn the manual drive program, you can changegear using the steering wheel paddle shifters
152 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking
or the selector lever (7G-TRONIC)(Y page 153).Further information about permanent driveprogram M (Y page 155).Further information about temporary driveprogram M (Y page 153).
i The full range of functions for the steeringwheel paddle shifters is available only onceoperating temperature has been reached.
i You can only change gear with the steer-ing wheel paddle shifters when the trans-mission is in position D.
Automatic drive program
Automatic drive programs E and SDrive program E (drive program C onMercedes-AMG vehicles) is characterized bythe following:Rcomfort-oriented engine and transmissionsettings.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner.Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fully.Rthe vehicle having improved driving stabil-ity, for example on slippery road surfaces.Rthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle beingdriven at lower engine speeds and thewheels being less likely to spin.
Drive program S is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rsporty engine and transmission settings.Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear.Rthe automatic transmission shifting uplater. the fuel consumption possibly beinghigher as a result of the later automatictransmission shift points.
Manual drive program M
General notesIn this drive program, you can briefly changegear yourself by using the steering wheel pad-dle shifters or the selector lever (7G-TRONIC).The transmission must be in position D.You can activate manual drive program M inthe E and S automatic drive programs.
i As well as temporary drive program M,you can also activate permanent drive pro-gram M (Y page 152).Further information about permanent driveprogram M (Y page 155).
ActivatingX Shift the transmission to position D.X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 152).Manual drive programM is temporarily acti-vated. The selected gear and M appear inthe multifunction display.
Changing gear (7G-TRONIC)X To shift up: press the selector lever to theright towards D+.
orX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 152).In cases where it is permissible, the auto-matic transmission shifts up to the nextgear.i If the maximum engine speed on the cur-rently engaged gear is reached and youcontinue to accelerate, the automatictransmission automatically shifts up inorder to prevent engine damage.
X To shift down: press the selector lever tothe left towards D–.
orX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 152).In cases where it is permissible, the auto-matic transmission shifts down to the nextgear.
Automatic transmission 153
Drivingandparking
Z
i For maximum acceleration, push theselector lever to the left or pull and hold theleft-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter untilthe transmission shifts to the optimal gearfor the current speed.
i If the engine exceeds the maximumengine speedwhen shifting down, the auto-matic transmission protects against enginedamage by not shifting down.
i Automatic down shifting occurs whencoasting.
Changing gear (9G-TRONIC)If you pull on the left or right steering wheelpaddle shifter, the automatic transmissionswitches to manual drive program M for alimited amount of time. Depending on whichpaddle shifter is pulled, the automatic trans-mission immediately shifts into the next geardown or up, if permitted.X To shift up: pull the right-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter (Y page 152).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.i If the maximum engine speed on the cur-rently engaged gear is reached and youcontinue to accelerate, the automatictransmission automatically shifts up inorder to prevent engine damage.
X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steer-ing wheel paddle shifter (Y page 152).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.i If the engine exceeds the maximumengine speedwhen shifting down, the auto-matic transmission protects against enginedamage by not shifting down.
i Automatic down shifting occurs whencoasting.
Shift recommendation
The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in themultifunctiondisplay.X Shift to recommended gear; accordingto gearshift recommendation: whenshown in the multifunction display of theinstrument cluster.
DisarmingIf you have activated manual drive programM, it will remain active for a certain amount oftime. Under certain conditions the minimumamount of time is extended, e.g. in the case oflateral acceleration, during an overrun phaseor when driving on steep terrain.If manual drive program M has been deacti-vated, the automatic transmission shifts intothe automatic drive program that was lastselected, i.e. E or S.You can also deactivate manual drive pro-gram M yourself:X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel pad-dle shifter and hold it in place (Y page 152).
orX Use the lever to switch the transmissionposition.
orX Use the program selector button to changethe drive program (Y page 152).Manual drive program M is deactivated.The automatic transmission switches intothe automatic drive program that was lastselected, i.e. E or S.
154 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking
Manual drive program
General informationIn this drive program, you can permanentlychange gear yourself by using the steeringwheel paddle shifters or the selector lever(7G-TRONIC). The transmission must be inposition D.
i As well as this permanent drive programM, you can also activate temporary driveprogram M (Y page 153).
Switching on the manual drive programManual drive program M is different fromdrive program S with regard to spontaneity,responsiveness and smoothness of gearchanges.Manual drive program M can be selectedusing the program selector button. You canchange gear using the steering wheel paddleshifters or the selector lever in manual driveprogramM if the transmission is in positionD.The selected gear appears in the multifunc-tion display.X Press the program selector button(Y page 152) repeatedly untilM appears inthe multifunction display.
Changing gear (7G-TRONIC)X To shift up: press the selector lever to theright towards D+.
orX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 152).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.
X To shift down: press the selector lever tothe left towards D–.
orX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 152).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.
i If you brake the vehicle or stop withoutshifting down, the automatic transmissionwill shift down to a gear that will allow thevehicle to accelerate or pull away again.
i For maximum acceleration, push theselector lever to the left or pull and hold theleft-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter untilthe transmission shifts to the optimal gearfor the current speed.
Changing gear (9G-TRONIC)X To shift up: pull the right-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter (Y page 152).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.
X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steer-ing wheel paddle shifter (Y page 152).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.
X Maximum acceleration: pull the left-handsteering wheel paddle shifter until thetransmission selects the optimum gear forthe current speed.i If you brake the vehicle or stop withoutshifting down, the automatic transmissionwill shift down to a gear that will allow thevehicle to accelerate or pull away again.
Shift recommendation
The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in themultifunctiondisplay.X Shift to recommended gear; accordingto gearshift recommendation: whenshown in the multifunction display of theinstrument cluster.
Automatic transmission 155
Drivingandparking
Z
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
! Inmanual drive programM, the automatictransmission does not shift up automati-cally even when the engine limiting speedfor the current gear is reached. When theengine limiting speed is reached, the fuelsupply is cut to prevent the engine fromoverrevving. Always make sure that theengine speed does not reach the red area ofthe tachometer. There is otherwise a risk ofengine damage.
: Gear indicator; Upshift indicatorBefore the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown in the mul-tifunction display.X When the UPmessage is shown in the mul-tifunction display, pull on the right-handsteering wheel paddle shifter.
KickdownYou can also use kickdown for maximumacceleration in manual drive program M.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is not possibleto use kickdown in manual drive program M.
Switching off themanual drive programX Press the program selector button(Y page 152).
156 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking
Problems with the transmission
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.
The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.
The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger changes gear.
The transmission is in emergency mode.7G-TRONIC: it is only possible to shift into second gear andreverse gear.9G-TRONIC: it is only partly possible to engage the gears or thetransmission is in position N.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.7G-TRONIC: If D is selected, the transmission shifts into sec-ond gear, if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reversegear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.
Deactivating the parking lock man-ually (7G-TRONIC)! Do not use any sharp-edged objects toremove the selector lever gaiter from thecenter console. This could damage theselector lever gaiter.
X Apply the electric parking brake.X Press the frame of selector level gaiter:together somewhat on the side edge at theback and hold with one hand;.
X With the other hand, pry off the frame ofselector level gaiter: with a flat, bluntobject (e.g. a screwdriver wrapped in cloth)at rear edge=, pulling it up and out at thesame time.
X Press release button? down and simul-taneously move the selector lever out ofposition P.The selector lever can now bemoved freelyuntil it is returned to position P.
In the event of an electrical malfunction, it ispossible to release the selector lever lockmanually to move it out of position P. This isthe case, for example, if you wish to tow thevehicle away.
Automatic transmission 157
Drivingandparking
Z
Refueling
Important safety notes
G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.
G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.
G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.
Do not get into the vehicle again during therefueling process. Otherwise, electrostaticcharge could build up again.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-tion if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-fied specialist workshop and have the fueltank and fuel lines drained completely.
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.
! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could sprayout when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 347).
Refueling
General informationThe fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-matically when you unlock or lock the vehiclewith the key or using KEYLESS-GO.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed8 in the instrument cluster. The arrownext to the filling pump indicates the side ofthe vehicle.
158 RefuelingDrivingandparking
Opening the fuel filler flap
: Fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Tire pressure table? Instruction label for fuel type to be refu-
eledX Switch the engine off.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap swings up.
X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwiseand remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holderbracket on the inside of fuel filler flap;.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in placeand refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.i Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise,fuel may leak out.
Closing the fuel filler flapX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.
X Close fuel filler flap:.
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle.
i If you are driving with the fuel filler capopen, the8 reserve fuel warning lampflashes. The; Check Engine warninglampmay also light up. A message appearsin the multifunction display (Y page 230).For further information onwarning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see(Y page 249).
Refueling 159
Drivingandparking
Z
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
G WARNINGRisk of explosion or fire.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 immediately and remove it(Y page 139).
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap can-not be opened.
The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 72).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 74).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-med.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking
Important safety notes
G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.
G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
! Always secure the vehicle correctlyagainst rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicleor its drivetrain could be damaged.
160 ParkingDrivingandparking
To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmission must be in position P andthe transmission position display mustshow P in the multifunction display.Rthe SmartKey must be removed from theignition lock.Rthe front wheels must be turned towardsthe curb on steep uphill or downhill gradi-ents.
Switching off the engine
Important safety notes
G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.
Vehicles with automatic transmissionX Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey toposition0 in the ignition lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.7G-TRONIC: the key can only be removed ifthe transmission is in position P.
X With KEYLESS-GO: press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button (Y page 140).The engine stops and all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster go out.When the driver's door is closed, this cor-responds to key position 1. When the driv-er's door is open, this corresponds toSmartKey position0: "SmartKey removed".
If you try to switch off the engine when thetransmission is not in position P, a messageappears in the multifunction display. A signalsounds.
Electric parking brake
General notes
G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The function of the electric parking brake isdependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunctionin the system, it may not be possible to applythe released parking brake.X If this is the case, only park the vehicle onlevel ground and secure it to prevent it roll-ing away.
X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.
It may not be possible to release an appliedparking brake if the on-board voltage is low orthere is a malfunction in the system. Contacta qualified specialist workshop.
i The electric parking brake performs afunction test at regular intervals while theengine is switched off. The sounds that canbe heard while this is occurring are normal.
Parking 161
Drivingandparking
Z
Applying or releasing manually
X To engage: push handle:.When the electric parking brake isengaged, theF (USA only) or!(Canada only) red indicator lamp lights upin the instrument cluster.i The electric parking brake can also beapplied when the SmartKey is removed.
X To release: switch on the ignition.X Pull handle:.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter goes out.i The electric parking brake can only bereleased:Rif the SmartKey is in position 1 in theignition lock (Y page 139) orRif the ignition was switched on using theStart/Stop button
Applying automatically (7G-TRONIC)The electric parking brake is applied auto-matically if:RDISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to astandstill orRthe HOLD function is keeping the vehiclestationary
In addition, at least one of the following con-ditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe engine is switched off.Rthe driver's seat belt is not inserted in thebelt buckle and the driver's door is open.Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthyperiod.
The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clusterlights up.The electric parking brake is not automati-cally engaged if the engine is switched off bythe ECO start/stop function.
Applying automatically (9G-TRONIC)The electric parking brake is automaticallyapplied when the transmission is in position Pand:Rthe engine is switched off orRthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and thedriver's door is opened.
To prevent the electric parking brake frombeing automatically applied, pull handle:.The electric parking brake is also engagedautomatically if:RDISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to astandstill orRthe HOLD function is keeping the vehiclestationary
In addition, at least one of the following con-ditions must be fulfilled:Rthere is a system malfunction.Rthe power supply is insufficient.Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthyperiod.
The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clusterlights up.The electric parking brake is not automati-cally engaged if the engine is switched off bythe ECO start/stop function.
162 ParkingDrivingandparking
Releasing automaticallyThe electric parking brake is released auto-matically when all of the following conditionsare fulfilled:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position D or R.Rthe driver's seat belt is fastened.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.If the transmission is in position R, the trunklid must be closed.If your seat belt is not fastened, the followingconditions must be fulfilled to automaticallyrelease the electric parking brake:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou have shifted out of P or you have pre-viously driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Ensure that you do not depress the acceler-ator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise theparking brake will be released and the vehiclewill start to move.
Emergency brakingThe vehicle can also be braked during anemergency by using the electric parkingbrake.X While driving, push handle:of the electricparking brake.i The vehicle is braked for as long as thehandle of the electric parking brake ispressed. The longer the electric parkingbrake handle is depressed, the greater thebraking force.
During braking:Ra warning tone soundsRthe Please Release Parking Brakemessage appearsRthe redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter flashes
When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-still, the electric parking brake is engaged.
Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.If you leave the vehicle parked for longer thansix weeks, the vehiclemay suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop andseek advice.
i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.
Driving tips
General notes
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the coun-try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic-tions prohibit the driver from using a mobilephone while driving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-freemode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you are
Driving tips 163
Drivingandparking
Z
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle coversa distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) persecond.
Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:RThe tires should always be inflated to therecommended tire pressure.RRemove unnecessary loads.RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds.RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking.RObserve the service intervals in the Main-tenance Booklet or in the service intervaldisplay. Have all themaintenancework car-ried in accordance with Daimler AG regu-lations.
Fuel consumption also increases when driv-ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and inhilly terrain.
Drinking and driving
G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent is greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.
Emission control
G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.
Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance withthe manufacturer's specifications. All workon the engine must be carried out only byqualified and authorized Mercedes-Benztechnicians.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. Furthermore, allspecific service work must be carried out atregular intervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
ECO display
The ECO display provides feedback on howeconomical your driving characteristics are.The ECO display assists you in achieving themost economical driving style for the selec-ted settings and prevailing conditions. Yourdriving style can significantly influence thevehicle's consumption.The ECO display consists of three bars:RAccel.RConstantRCoastingThe percent value is the average value of thethree bars. The three bars and themean valuebegin at the value of 50 %. A higher percent-age indicates a more economical drivingstyle.
164 Driving tipsDrivingandparking
The ECO display does not indicate the actualfuel consumption. A fixed percentage countin the ECO display does not indicate a fixedconsumption.Apart from driving style, consumption isdependent on many factors such as, e.g.:RloadRtire pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRelectrical consumers switched onThese factors are not included in the ECO dis-play.The evaluation of your driving style is carriedout using the following three categories:RAccel. (evaluation of all acceleration pro-cesses):- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,especially at higher speeds
- The bar empties: sporty accelerationRConstant (assessment of driving behaviorat all times):- The bar fills up: constant speed andavoidance of unnecessary accelerationand deceleration
- The bar empties: fluctuations in speedRCoasting (assessment of all decelerationprocesses):- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,keeping your distance and early releaseof the accelerator. The vehicle can coastwithout use of the brakes.
- The bar empties: frequent braking
i An economical driving style speciallyrequires driving at moderate enginespeeds.To achieve a higher value in the categoriesAcceleration and Constant:Robserve the gearshift recommendations.Rdrive in drive program E.
i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.on the highway, only the bar for Constantwill change.
i The ECO display summarizes the drivingcharacteristics from the start of the journeyto its completion. For this reason, the barschange dynamically at the beginning of thejourney. On longer journeys, there arefewer changes. Formore dynamic changes,carry out a manual reset.
For more information on the ECO display, see(Y page 198).
Brakes
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.
Downhill gradients
! On long, steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes. To useengine braking, shift to a lower gear in goodtime. This helps you to avoid overheatingthe brakes and wearing them out exces-sively.When making use of the engine brakingeffect, it is possible that a drive wheel maynot turn for some time, e.g. in the case ofsuddenly changing or slippery road surfaceconditions. This could cause damage to thedrive train. This type of damage is not cov-ered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This is espe-cially important if the vehicle is laden.This also applies if you have activated cruisecontrol, SPEEDTRONIC or DISTRONIC PLUS.
Driving tips 165
Drivingandparking
Z
Heavy and light loads
G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately, butdrive on for a short while. This allows the air-flow to cool the brakes more quickly.
Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, theremay be a delayed reac-tion from the brakeswhen braking for the firsttime. Thismay also occur after the vehicle hasbeen washed or driven through deep water.You then have to depress the brake pedalmore firmly. Maintain a greater distance fromthe vehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten-tion to the traffic conditions. This will warmupthe brake discs, thereby drying them morequickly and protecting them against corro-sion.
Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs andbrake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.
RBrake occasionally to remove any possiblesalt residue. Make sure that you do notendanger other road users when doing so.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.
Servicing the brakes
! The brake fluid level may be too low, if:Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster andRyou hear a warning tone while the engineis running
Observe additional warning messages inthe multifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checked immedi-ately. Consult a qualified specialist work-shop to arrange this.
! As the ESP® system operates automati-cally, the engine and the ignition must beswitched off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 inthe ignition lock) if the electric parkingbrake is being tested on a brake dynamom-eter (maximum 10 seconds).Braking triggered automatically by ESP®may seriously damage the brake system.
All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test the function-ality of your brakes at regular intervals.Information on BAS (Brake Assist)(Y page 62).Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyhave brake pads/linings installed on yourvehicle which have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspondto an equivalent quality standard. Brake
166 Driving tipsDrivingandparking
pads/linings which have not been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are notof an equivalent quality could affect your vehi-cle's operating safety.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse brake fluid that has been speciallyapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,or which corresponds to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake fluid which has not beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles orwhich is not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.
High-performance and ceramic brakesystem (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)The high-performance brake system is onlyavailable on Mercedes-AMG vehicles.The AMG brake systems are designed forheavy loads. This may lead to noise whenbraking. This will depend on:RSpeedRBraking forceRAmbient conditions, e.g. temperature andhumidity
The wear of individual components of thebrake system, such as the brake pads/liningsor brake discs, depends on the individual driv-ing style and operating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state amileage that will be valid under all circum-stances. An aggressive driving style will leadto high wear. You can obtain more informa-tion on this from a qualified specialist work-shop.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after sev-eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-sate for this by applying greater force to thebrake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adaptyour driving and braking accordingly duringthis break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results in corre-spondingly high brake wear. Observe thebrake system warning lamp in the instrumentcluster and note any brake status messages
in the multifunction display. Especially forhigh performance driving, it is important tomaintain and have the brake system checkedregularly.
Driving on wet roads
HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Ravoid sudden steering movements.Rbrake carefully.
Driving on flooded roads
! Do not drive through flooded areas.Check the depth of anywater before drivingthrough it. Drive slowly through standingwater. Otherwise, water may enter thevehicle interior or the engine compartment.This can damage the electronic compo-nents in the engine or the automatic trans-mission. Water can also be drawn in by theengine's air suction nozzles and this cancause engine damage.
Winter driving
G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.
Driving tips 167
Drivingandparking
Z
G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali-fied specialist workshop at the onset of win-ter.Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand braking maneuvers. Do not use cruisecontrol.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freez-ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Thevehicle could skid if you fail to adapt yourdriving style. Always adapt your driving styleand drive at a speed to suit the prevailingweather conditions.You should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 311).For more information on driving with summertires, see (Y page 310).
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 310).
Driving systems
Cruise Control
General notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. On long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden, you must select a lower gearin good time. By doing so, youwill make use ofthe braking effect of the engine. This relievesthe load on the brake system and preventsthe brakes from overheating and wearing tooquickly.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).
Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk of an acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruisecontrol cannot take into account the road,traffic and weather conditions. Cruise controlis only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,for braking in good time and for staying inlane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drivewheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.
168 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
Cruise control lever
Cruise control lever: To store the current speed or a higher
speed; To store the current speed or call up the
last stored speed= To store the current speed or a lower
speed? To deactivate cruise controlWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the status indicator of themultifunction display:RUSA only: e.g. CRUISE 55 MilesRCanada only: e.g.¯ 90 Km/hStoring, maintaining and calling up aspeed
Storing and maintaining a speedX Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up:or down?.
X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.
You can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumedwhen the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.
i Vehicles with manual transmission:RAlways drive at adequate, but not exces-sive, engine speeds.RChange gear in good time.RIf possible, do not shift down severalgears at a time.
Storing or calling up a speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardyou=.
X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.
Setting a speed
G WARNINGKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has made the necessaryadjustments.Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed toa value that the prevailing road conditions andlegal speed limits permit. Otherwise, suddenand unexpected acceleration or decelerationof the vehicle could cause an accident and/orserious injury to you and others.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): briefly
Driving systems 169
Drivingandparking
Z
press the cruise control lever up: to thepressure point for a higher speed ordown? for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: pastthe pressure point for a higher speed ordown? for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. For exam-ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speedto the last speed stored after you have fin-ished overtaking.
Deactivating cruise control
Cruise control lever
There are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards: .
orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20 mph(30 km/h)
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ron vehicles with manual transmission, youshift to a gear that is too high, and as aresult the engine speed is too lowRyou shift the transmission to position Nwhile driving
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear awarning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐trol Off message in the multifunction dis-play for approximately five seconds.
i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.
DISTRONIC PLUS
General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain the dis-tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehi-cles are detected with the aid of the radarsensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakesautomatically to avoid exceeding the setspeed or to maintain the designated distancefrom the vehicle in front.Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This is espe-cially important if the vehicle is laden. Bydoing so, you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine. This relieves the load onthe brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a riskof a collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot pre-vent a collision without your intervention. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound andthe distance warning lamp will light up in theinstrument cluster. Brake immediately inorder to increase the distance to the vehiclein front or take evasive action provided it issafe to do so.DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.
170 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
Important safety notes
G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.
G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-tify other road users and complex traffic sit-uations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate or brake unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.
G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 50% of themaximumpossible deceleration.If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONICPLUS warns you visually and audibly. There isa risk of an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations.
To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func-tion in the following or other similar situa-tions:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash
If you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the riskof accident nor override the laws of physics.DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions.DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drivewheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample, in parking garages
If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi-cle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpect-edly accelerate the vehicle to the storedspeed.
Driving systems 171
Drivingandparking
Z
This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter laneor an exit laneRbe so high when driving in the right-handlane that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand laneRbe so highwhen driving in the left-hand lanethat you overtake vehicles in the right-handlane
If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
Cruise control lever: To store the current speed or a higher
speed; To set the specified minimum distance= To store the current speed or call up the
last stored speed? To store the current speed or a lower
speedA To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS; storing,maintaining and calling up a speed
Important safety notes! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations.
To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func-tion in the following or other similar situa-tions:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash
In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol-lowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take upto two minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Ryour vehicle must not be secured by theelectric parking brake.RESP® must be activated.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe hood must be closed.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door must be closed.Rthe vehicle must not skid.
ActivatingX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou=, up: or down? .DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: to thepressure point for a higher speed, ordown? for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.
orX To adjust the speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: past
172 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
the pressure point for a higher speed, ordown? for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.
X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.
i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passivemes-sage appears in the multifunction display.The set distance to a slower-moving vehiclein front will then not bemaintained. Youwillbe driving at the speed you determine bythe position of the accelerator pedal.
You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS whenstationary. The lowest speed that can be set is30 km/h.
Pulling away and drivingThe vehicle can also pull away when it isfacing an unidentified obstacle or is driving ona different line from another vehicle. The vehi-cle then brakes automatically. Be ready tobrake at all times.If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.X If you want to pull away withDISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot fromthe brake pedal.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou=.
orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts itsspeed to that of the vehicle in front.If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehi-cle accelerates to the set speed.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle.
In this way, the distance you have selected ismaintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.The vehicle is only accelerated up to thespeed you have stored.
Selecting the drive programDISTRONIC Plus supports a sporty drivingstyle when you have selected the S orM driv-ing program (Y page 152). Accelerationbehind the vehicle in front or to the set speedis then noticeably more dynamic. If you haveselected the E (AMG vehicles: C) drive pro-gram, the vehicle accelerates more gently.This setting is recommended in stop-and-start traffic.
Changing lanesIf you wish to move into the overtaking lane(for left-hand-drive vehicles, the passing laneis the left-hand lane), DISTRONIC PLUSassists you if:Ryou are driving faster than 70 km/hRDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the dis-tance to a vehicle in frontRyou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a dangerof collision
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interruptedif changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-tance between your vehicle and the vehicle infront becomes too small.
StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.
Driving systems 173
Drivingandparking
Z
Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.
Deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 176).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until itis stationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remainsstationary and you do not need to depress thebrake. After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.Depending on the specified minimum dis-tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill ata sufficient distance behind the vehicle infront. The specified minimum distance is setusing the control on the cruise control lever.Vehicles with 7G-TRONIC:The electric parking brake automaticallysecures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS isactivated and:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver'sseat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.Rthe hood is opened.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If there is a malfunction in the vehicle elec-tronics, a warning message may also appearin the multifunction display.Brake ImmediatelyX Immediately depress the brake firmly untilthe warning message in the multifunction
display goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is deac-tivated.
Vehicles with 7G-TRONIC: Shift to 'P'X Shift the transmission to position P to pre-vent the vehicle from rolling away.DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. The warn-ing message in the multifunction displaydisappears.
The horn will also sound at regular intervals ifDISTRONIC PLUS is activated and you:Rswitch the engine off, open the driver'sdoor and remove your seat belt.Ropen the hoodThe sounding of the horn alerts you to the factthat the vehicle has been parked whileDISTRONIC PLUS is still activated. The soundbecomes louder if you attempt to lock thevehicle. The vehicle is not locked untilDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
i If the engine has been switched off, itcannot be started again until DISTRONICPLUS has been deactivated.
Vehicles with 9G‑TRONIC:When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, thetransmission is shifted automatically to posi-tion P if:Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and thedriver's door is open.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activatedwhen the vehicle is stationary and:Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If a malfunction in the electric parking brakeoccurs, then the transmission may also beshifted into position P automatically.
174 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
Storing the current speed or calling up thelast stored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou=.
X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The firsttime it is activated, the current speed isstored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruisespeed to the previously stored value.
Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: to thepressure point for a higher speed ordown? for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: pastthe pressure point for a higher speed ordown? for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.
Setting the specifiedminimumdistanceYou can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds.With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 176).Make sure that you maintain a sufficientlysafe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjustthe distance to the vehicle in front if neces-sary.
Cruise control leverX To increase: turn control= toward;.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.
X To decrease: turn control= toward:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.
Driving systems 175
Drivingandparking
Z
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru-ment cluster
Displays in the speedometer
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one ortwo segments; in the set speed range lightup.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments; between speed of the vehicle infront: and stored speed= light up.
i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-vated
: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to
the vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-
cle in front; adjustable? Own vehicle
X Select the Assistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 203).
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-ted
: Vehicle in front, if detected; Specified minimum distance to the vehi-
cle in front; adjustable= Own vehicle? DISTRONIC PLUS activatedX Select the Assistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 203).
You will initially see the stored speed forabout five seconds when you activateDISTRONIC PLUS.
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
Cruise control lever
176 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:.
orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationaryWhen you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, youwill see the DISTRONIC PLUS Offmessage inthe multifunction display for approximatelyfive seconds.
i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-erate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUSadjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished over-taking.
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-ted if:Ryou engage the electric parking brake or ifthe vehicle is automatically secured withthe electric parking brakeRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R orN positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towardsyou in order to pull away and the front-passenger door is openRthe vehicle has skiddedIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. You will see theDISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multi-function display for approximately five sec-onds.
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
General notesThe following contains descriptions of certainroad and traffic conditions in which you mustbe particularly attentive. In such situations,brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is thendeactivated.
Cornering, going into and coming out of abend
The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-cles when cornering is limited. Your vehiclemay brake unexpectedly or late.
Vehicles traveling on a different line
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehiclestraveling on a different line. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.
Other vehicles changing lanes
Driving systems 177
Drivingandparking
Z
DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi-cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehiclewill be too short.
Narrow vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the road,because of its narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, thedetected vehicle turns a corner and revealsan obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONICPLUS will not brake for these.
Crossing vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detectvehicles that are crossing your lane. Activat-ing DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights withcrossing traffic, for example, could causeyour vehicle to pull away unintentionally.
Dynamic handling package
General notes
The adjustable damping system adapts to thecurrent driving conditions. The adjustmentdepends on whether you have selected Sportor Comfort mode. Your selection remainsstored even if you remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock.
Sports tuningThe firmer setting of the suspension tuning insports mode ensures even better contactwith the road. Select this mode if you wantmore direct contact with the road whenemploying a sporty driving style, e.g. on wind-ing country roads.
178 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
X If indicator lamp: is not lit: press but-ton;.Indicator lamp: lights up. You have selec-ted the suspension for a sporty drivingstyle.
Comfort tuningSelect comfort mode if you prefer a morecomfortable driving style.X If indicator lamp: is lit: press but-ton;.Indicator lamp: goes out. You have selec-ted the suspension for a comfortable driv-ing style.
HOLD function
General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steepslopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations.To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func-tion in the following or other similar situa-tions:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash
Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 180) .
Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is running or if it has been auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop functionRthe driver's door is closed or your seat beltis fastenedRthe hood is closed.Rthe electric parking brake is releasedRthe transmission is in position D, R or NRDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
Activating the HOLD function
Driving systems 179
Drivingandparking
Z
X Make sure that the activation conditionsare met.
X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntil: HOLD appears in the multifunctiondisplay.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.
i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.
Deactivating the HOLD function
General notesThe HOLD function is deactivated automati-cally if:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is inposition D or R.Ryou shift the transmission to position P.Ryou apply the brakes again with a certainamount of pressure until HOLD disappearsfrom the multifunction display.Ryou secure the vehicle using the electricparking brake.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.
Vehicles with manual transmission or 7G-TRONICThe electric parking brake automaticallysecures the vehicle if the HOLD function isactivated and:Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and thedriver's door is open.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.Rthe hood is opened.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
If there is a malfunction in the vehicle elec-tronics, a warning message may also appearin the multifunction display.Brake ImmediatelyX Immediately depress the brake firmly untilthe warning message in the multifunctiondisplay goes out.The HOLD function is deactivated.
Vehicles with 7G-TRONIC only: Shift to'P'X Shift the transmission to position P to pre-vent the vehicle from rolling away.The HOLD function is deactivated. Thewarning message in the multifunction dis-play disappears.
The horn will also sound at regular intervals ifthe HOLD function is activated and you:Rswitch the engine off, open the driver'sdoor and remove your seat belt.Ropen the hoodThe sounding of the horn alerts you to the factthat the vehicle has been parked while theHOLD function is still activated. If you attemptto lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.The vehicle is not locked until the HOLD func-tion is deactivated.
i If the engine has been switched off, itcannot be started again until the HOLDfunction has been deactivated.
Vehicles with 9G‑TRONIC:When the HOLD function is activated, thetransmission is shifted automatically to posi-tion P if:Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and thedriver's door is open.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if the HOLD function is activa-ted when the vehicle is stationary and:Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
180 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
If a malfunction in the electric parking brakeoccurs, then the transmission may also beshifted into position P automatically.
PARKTRONIC
Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediatesurroundings. You are always responsible forsafe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park-ing space. When maneuvering, parking orpulling out of a parking space, make sure thatthere are no persons, animals or objects inthe area in which you are maneuvering.
! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars.PARKTRONIC does not detect such objectswhen they are in the immediate vicinity ofthe vehicle. You could damage the vehicleor the objects.The sensorsmay not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.PARKTRONICmay not function correctly onuneven terrain.
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRmove the selector lever to position D, R orN on vehicles with automatic transmissionRrelease the electric parking brake.PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.
PARKTRONIC monitors the area around yourvehicle using six sensors in the front bumperand four sensors in the rear bumper.
Range of the sensors
General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-sideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-mals or objects.Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhang-ing loads, truck overhangs or loadingramps.
: Sensors in the front bumper, left-handside (example)
Side view
Driving systems 181
Drivingandparking
Z
Top view
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice orslush. They can otherwise not function cor-rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 285).
Front sensors
Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm)
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)
Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center Approx. 8 in (approx.20 cm)
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx.15 cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and a warn-ing tone sounds. If the distance falls belowthe minimum, the distance may no longer beshown.
Warning displays
Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the
vehicle; Segments on the right-hand side of the
vehicle= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is locatedon the dashboard above the center air vents.The warning display for the rear area is loca-ted between the roll bars.The warning display for each side of the vehi-cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellowsegments showing operational readiness=light up.The selector lever position or selected auto-matic transmission position and the directioninwhich the vehicle is rolling determinewhichwarning display is active when the engine isrunning.Manual transmission:
Gear lever posi-tion
Warning display
Forwards gearorNeutral
Front area activated
Reverse gear orthe vehicle is rollingbackwards
Rear and front areasactivated
182 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
Automatic transmission:
Transmissionposition
Warning display
D Front area activated
R, N or the vehicleis rolling back-wards
Rear and front areasactivated
P No areas activated
One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear anintermittent warning tone for approx-imately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two sec-onds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
: Indicator lamp; Deactivates/activates PARKTRONICIf indicator lamp: is on then PARKTRONIC isdeactivated. Parking Guidance is also deacti-vated.
i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position2 inthe ignition lock.
Driving systems 183
Drivingandparking
Z
Problems with PARKTRONIC
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after approx-imately 20 seconds,and the indicator lampin the PARKTRONICbutton lights up.
PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after approx-imately five seconds.
The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 285).X Switch the ignition back on.
The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Parking Guidance
Important safety notesParking Guidance is an electronic parking aidwith ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to meas-ure the road on both sides of the vehicle. Asuitable parking space is indicated by theparking symbol. You receive steering instruc-tions when parking. You may also usePARKTRONIC (Y page 181).Parking Guidance is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your imme-diate surroundings. You are always responsi-ble for safe maneuvering, parking and exitinga parking space. When maneuvering, parkingor pulling out of a parking space, make surethat there are no persons, animals or objectsin the area in which you are maneuvering.
G WARNINGIf objects are located above the detectionrange, ParkingGuidancemay provide steeringinstructions too soon. You may cause a colli-sion as a result. There is a risk of an accident.If objects are located above the detectionrange, stop and switch off Parking Assist.
! If unavoidable, you should drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and not at asharp angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels or tires.
When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, ParkingGuidance is also unavailable.Parking Guidance may also display spacesnot suitable for parking, e.g.:Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfaces
184 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, i.e.not on the pavement, for example. ParkingGuidance may not detect flat curbs
Parking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park-ing space as possible.RParking spaces that are littered or over-grown might be identified or measuredincorrectly.RParking spaces that are partially occupiedby trailer drawbars might not be identifiedas such or be measured incorrectly.RSnowfall or heavy rainmay lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC(Y page 182) warning messages during theparking procedure.RWhen transporting a load which protrudesfrom your vehicle, youmust not use ParkingGuidance.RNever use Parking Guidance with snowchains or an emergency spare wheel moun-ted.RMake sure that the tire pressures arealways correct. This has a direct effect onthe steering instructions.RThe way your vehicle is positioned in theparking space after parking is dependenton various factors. These include the posi-tion and shape of the vehicles parked infront and behind it and the conditions of thelocation. In some cases, Parking Guidancemay guide you too far or not far enough intoa parking space. In some cases, it may alsolead you across or onto the curb. If neces-sary, cancel the parking procedure withParking Guidance.
Detecting parking spaces
: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the rightParking Guidance is automatically activatedwhen you drive forwards. The system isoperational at speeds of up to approximately22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, thesystem independently locates and measuresparking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol; asa status indicator in the instrument cluster.When a parking space has been detected, anarrow towards the right= or the left: alsoappears. Parking Guidance only displaysparking spaces on the front-passenger sideas standard. Parking spaces on the driver'sside are displayed as soon as the turn signalon the driver's side is activated. To park onthe driver's side, you must leave the driver'sside turn signal switched on until you haveengaged reverse gear.Parking Guidance will only detect parkingspaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are at least 5 ft (1.5 m) wideRthat are at least 4.3 ft (1.3 m) longer thanyour vehicle
A parking space is displayed while you aredriving past it, and until you are approx-imately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.
Driving systems 185
Drivingandparking
Z
Parking
Moving the vehicle into the stop positionX Stop the vehicle when the parking spacesymbol shows the desired parking space inthe instrument cluster.
X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift toreverse gear.Vehicles with automatic transmission: shiftinto position R.The multifunction display shows theCheck Vehicle Surroundings Press'OK' to Confirm message.
X Press thea button on the multifunctionsteering wheel to confirm.The multifunction display switches to Park-ing Guidance.Depending on your distance from the park-ing space, the Please Drive Backwardmessage will appear in the multifunctiondisplay.
X If necessary, reverse towards the parkingspace. This is indicated by an arrow point-ing backwards.Continue backing up until you hear a tone.Stop – the stop position has been reached.The arrow is white.The Please Steer Wheel to the Rightor Please Steer Wheel to the Leftmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.
Backing up into the parking space
X While the vehicle is stationary, turn thesteering wheel in the specified directionuntil the arrow is white and a warning tonesounds.
X To reverse into the parking space:main-tain the steering wheel angle and reversecarefully.
X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone,The vehicle has reached the position inwhich you need to countersteer.The Please Steer Wheel to the Rightor Please Steer Wheel to the Leftmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.
X To countersteer: while the vehicle is sta-tionary, turn the steering wheel in thespecified direction until the arrow is whiteand a warning tone sounds.
X To reverse into the parking space:main-tain the steering wheel angle and reversecarefully.
X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone, atthe latest when PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone.The Parking Guidance Finished mes-sage appears in the multifunction displayand a tone sounds. You may be asked tosteer in a different direction and thenchange gear. In this case, further displaysin the multifunction display will direct youto the final position.
186 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
X Maneuver if necessary.X Always observe the warning messages dis-played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 182).
Canceling Parking GuidanceX Press the PARKTRONIC button on the cen-ter console (Y page 183).Parking Guidance is canceled immediatelyand PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
Parking Guidance is canceled automatically ifit is no longer possible to guide you into theparking space, or if a malfunction occurs.The parking space symbol goes out and awarning tone sounds. The Parking Guid‐ance Canceledmessage appears in themul-tifunction display.
ATTENTION ASSIST
Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways.It is active in the range between 50 mph(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h).If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indica-tors of fatigue or increasing lapses in con-centration on the part of the driver, it sug-gests you take a break.ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level offatigue or lapses in concentration by takingthe following criteria into account:Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steeringcharacteristicsRjourney details, e.g. time of day and lengthof journey
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed ornot occur at all:Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-face is uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side wind
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving stylewith high cornering speeds or high rates ofaccelerationRif you are predominantly driving slowerthan 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than112 mph (180 km/h)Rif you are currently using COMAND or mak-ing a telephone call with itRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as whenyou change lanes or change your speed
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to thedriver. It might not always recognize fatigueor increasing inattentiveness in time or fail torecognize them at all. The system is not asubstitute for a well-rested and attentivedriver.
Warning and display messages in themultifunction displayX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 203).If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will bewarned no sooner than 20 minutes afteryour journey has begun. You then hear anintermittent warning tone twice and theAttention Assist: Take a Break!message appears in the multifunction dis-play.
X If necessary, take a break.X Press thea or% button to confirmthe message.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If youdo not take a break and ATTENTION ASSISTstill detects increasing lapses in concentra-tion, you will be warned again after15 minutes at the earliest.ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you con-tinue your journey and starts assessing yourtiredness again if:Ryou switch off the engine.Ryou take off your seat belt and open thedriver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers orto take a break.
Driving systems 187
Drivingandparking
Z
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay in the assistance graphics display.
Driving Assistance package
General notesThe Driving Assistance package consists ofBlind Spot Assist (Y page 188) and LaneKeeping Assist (Y page 189).
Blind Spot Assist
General notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor systemto monitor the areas on both sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from a speed ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in the moni-tored area. If you then switch on the corre-sponding turn signal to change lanes, you willalso receive a visual and audible collisionwarning. Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in therear bumper for monitoring purposes.For Blind Spot Assist to assist you, the radarsensor system must be operational.
Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.
Monitoring range of the sensors
Blind Spot Assistmonitors the area up to 10 ft(3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly nextto your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. Forthis purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses radarsensors in the rear bumper.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in themiddle of their lane. This may bethe case if there are vehicles driving at theinner edge of their lanes.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-ing close to crash barriers or similar solidlane borders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, suchas trucks.
The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assistare integrated into the sides of the rear
188 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free ofdirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.The sensors must not be covered, for exam-ple by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Fol-lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam-age to the bumpers, have the function of thesensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwisenot work properly.
Indicator and warning display
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lampWhen Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp: in the exterior mirrors lights up yel-low at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). Atspeeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indica-tor lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist isoperational.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the corre-sponding side lights up red. This warning isalways emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind SpotAssist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.
Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, vehicles detectedare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp:. There are no further warning tones.
Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activa-ted in the on-board computer(Y page 203).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately 1.5 secondsand then turn yellow.
Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle with camera:, which ismounted at the top of the windshield. LaneKeeping Assist detects lane markings on theroad and warns you before you leave yourlane unintentionally.If you select km on the on-board computer inthe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer func-tion (Y page 204), Lane Keeping Assist isactive starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If themiles display unit is selected, the assistancerange begins at 40 mph.A warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lanemarking. It will warn you by
Driving systems 189
Drivingandparking
Z
means of intermittent vibration in the steer-ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.
G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. There isa risk of an accident.You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-ing Assist.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions. LaneKeeping Assist is merely an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep thevehicle in the lane.The systemmay be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the camera
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-struction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the lane
Switching on Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandard or Adaptive (Y page 204).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 203) are shown in green. LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.
StandardIf Standard is selected, no warning vibrationoccurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.
AdaptiveWhen Adaptive is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.
190 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only when nec-essary and in good time if you cross the lanemarking, the system recognizes certain con-ditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high-way.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
Driving systems 191
Drivingandparking
Z
192
Useful information ............................ 194Important safety notes ..................... 194Displays and operation ..................... 194Menus and submenus ...................... 197Display messages ............................. 211Warning and indicator lamps ........... 241
193
On-board
computerand
displays
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the on-board computer.
G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.
The on-board computer only showsmessagesor warnings from certain systems in the mul-tifunction display. You should therefore make
sure your vehicle is operating safely at alltimes.If the operating safety of your vehicle isimpaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to doso. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.For an overview, see the instrument panelillustration (Y page 31).
Displays and operation
Instrument cluster lightingThe lighting in the instrument cluster, in thedisplays and the controls in the vehicle inte-rior can be adjusted using the brightness con-trol knob.The brightness control knob is located on thebottom left of the instrument cluster(Y page 31).X Turn the brightness control knob clockwiseor counter-clockwise.If you turn the light switch toÃ, T orL, the brightness is dependent uponthe brightness of the ambient light.
i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness ofthe multifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are not illuminated.
Speedometer with segmentsThe speedometer is divided into segmentsonly on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS.The segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 170):One or two segments in the set speedrange light up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in frontthat is driving at a slower speed than thestored speed:
194 Displays and operationOn
-board
computerand
displays
The segments between the speed of thevehicle in front and the stored speed lightup.
Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.Bear in mind that the outside temperaturedisplay indicates the temperature measuredand does not record the road temperature.The outside temperature display is in themul-tifunction display (Y page 196).A change in the outside temperature is shownin the multifunction display after a delay.
Coolant temperature display
G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.
! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. Theengine will otherwise be damaged.
The coolant temperature gauge is in theinstrument cluster on the right-hand side(Y page 31).Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified coolant level, the coolant tem-perature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
Operating the on-board computer
Overview
: Multifunction display; Switches on the Voice Control System
(see the separate operating instructions)= Right control panel? Left control panelA Back buttonX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position 1 in the ignitionlock.
You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.
Displays and operation 195
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Left control panel
=
;
RCalls up the menu and menu bar
9
:
Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the Audio menu: selects astored station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephonenumber
9
:
Press and hold:RIn the Audio menu: selects theprevious/next station or selectsan audio track or a video sceneusing rapid scrollingRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:starts rapid scrolling if the phonebook is open
a RConfirms the selection or displaymessageRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumberRIn the Audio menu: stops thestation search function at thedesired station
Right control panel
~ RRejects or ends a callRExits the telephone book/redialmemory
6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory
WX
RAdjusts the volume
8 RMute
Back button
% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off the Voice ControlSystem (see the separate oper-ating instructions)RHides display messages or callsup the last Trip menu functionusedRExits the telephone book/redialmemory
% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display inthe Trip menu
Multifunction display
: Transmission position (Y page 149); Drive program (Y page 149)= Text field? Menu bar
196 Displays and operationOn
-board
computerand
displays
A TimeB Outside temperature or speed
(Y page 205)X To display menu bar?: press the=or; button on the steering wheel.If you do not press the buttons any longer,menu bar? is faded out after a few sec-onds.Text field= shows the selected menu orsubmenu as well as display messages.
i You can set the time using COMAND (seethe separate operating instructions).
Possible displays in themultifunction display:Z Gearshift recommendation when
shifting manually (Y page 153)XjY Parking Guidance (Y page 184)CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 168)_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 112)è ECO start/stop function
(Y page 143)ë HOLD function (Y page 179)
Menus and submenus
Menu overviewUsing the= or; button on the steer-ing wheel, open the menu bar.Operating the on-board computer(Y page 195).Depending on the vehicle equipment, you canselect the following menu:RTrip menu (Y page 197)RNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 199)RAudio menu (Y page 200)RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 201)RDriveAssist menu (assistance)(Y page 202)RServ menu (Y page 204)
RSett menu (settings) (Y page 204)RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)(Y page 208)
Trip menu
Standard display
X Press and hold the% button on thesteering wheel until the Trip menu withtrip odometer: and odometer;appears.
Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"
: Distance; Driving time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the9 or: button to selectFrom Start or From Reset.
The values in the From Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey whilstthe values in the From Reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 199).In the following cases, the trip computer isautomatically reset From Start:
Menus and submenus 197
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.When 9,999 hours or 99,999miles have beenexceeded, the trip computer is automaticallyreset From Reset.ECO display
The ECO display is not available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the9 or: button to selectECO DISPLAY.
If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will be auto-matically reset.For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 164).
Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only dis-plays approximate range:.
X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press9 or: to select the displaywith approximate range: and current fuelconsumption;.Approximate range: that can be coveredis calculated according to your current driv-ing style and the amount of fuel in the tank.If there is only a small amount of fuel left inthe fuel tank, a vehicle being refueledCappears instead of approximate range:.Recuperation display= shows you ifenergy has been recuperated from thekinetic energy in overrun mode and savedin the battery. Recuperation display=depends on the engine installed and istherefore not available in all vehicles.
Digital speedometer
X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the9 or: button to selectdigital speedometer;.Gearshift recommendation: Z can alsoappear in the display.Observe the information on gearshift rec-ommendation: when shifting manually(Y page 153).Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift rec-ommendation is shown in the status bar ofthemultifunction display and not in the dig-ital speedometer display.
198 Menus and submenusOn
-board
computera
nddisplays
Resetting values
X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.
X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press: to select Yes and pressa toconfirm.
You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computerRECO display
i If you reset the values in the ECO display,the values in the "FromStart" trip computerare also reset. If you reset the values in the"From Start" trip computer, the values inthe ECO display are also reset.
Navigation system menu
Displaying navigation instructionsIn the Navi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions. Further infor-mation on navigation (see the separate oper-ating instructions).X Switch on COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).
X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Navi menu.
Route guidance not active
: Direction of travel; Current road
Route guidance active
No change of direction announced
: Distance to the destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current road? "Follow the road's course" symbol
Change of direction announced without alane recommendation
: Road into which the change of directionleads
; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display
= Change-of-direction symbolWhen a change of direction is announced, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distance indi-cator shortens towards the top of the displayas you approach the point of the announced
Menus and submenus 199
On-board
computera
nddisplays
Z
change of direction. The change of directionstarts once the distance display reaches zero.
Change of direction announced with alane recommendation
: Road into which the change of directionleads
; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display
= Lanes not recommended? Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of directionA Change-of-direction symbolOn multilane roads, new lane recommenda-tions can be displayed for the next change ofdirection if the digital map supports this data.During the change of direction, new lanesmay be added.Lane not recommended=: you will not beable to complete the next change of directionif you stay in this lane.Recommended lane and new lane during achange of direction?: in this lane you will beable to complete the next two changes ofdirection without changing lane.
Other status indicators of the naviga-tion systemThe navigation system displays additionalinformation and the vehicle status.RO: you have reached the destination or anintermediate destination.RNew Route... or Calculating Route:calculating a new routeROff Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicleposition is inside the area of the digital map
but the road is not recognize, e.g. newroads, car parks or private landRNo Route: no route could be calculated tothe selected destination
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
: Frequency range; Station frequency with memory positionThe multifunction display shows station;with station frequency or station name. Thepreset position is only displayed along withstation; if this has been stored.X Switch on the audio system or COMANDand select Radio; see the separate operat-ing instructions.
X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select a stored station: briefly pressthe9 or: button.
X To select a station from the station list:press and briefly hold the9 or:button.
If no station list is received:X To select a station using the stationsearch: press and briefly hold the9or: button.
i For information on changing frequencyrange and storing stations, see the sepa-rate operating instructions.
i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.You can find further information on radiooperation in the separate operating instruc-tions.
200 Menus and submenusOn
-board
computera
nddisplays
Operating an audio player or audiomedia
Audio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on the equip-ment installed in the vehicle.X Switch on COMAND and select audio CD orMP3 mode, see the separate operatinginstructions.
X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous track:briefly press the9 or: button.
X To select a track from the track list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9or: button until desired track:appears.If you press and hold the9 or:button, the rapid scrolling speed isincreased. Not all audio drives or data car-riers support this function.
If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and title of the track.The current track does not appear in audioAUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: externalaudio source connected).
Video DVD operation
X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD(see the separate operating instructions).
X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next or previous scene:briefly press the9 or: button.
X To select a scene from the scene list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9or: button until desired scene:appears.
Telephone menu
Introduction
G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.
When telephoning, you must observe thelegal requirements for the country in whichyou are currently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone (see the man-ufacturer’s operating instructions).
X Switch on COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).
X Establish a Bluetooth® connection toCOMAND, see the separate operatinginstructions.
X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Tel menu.
You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPhone READY or the name of the mobilephone network provider:
Menus and submenus 201
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
The mobile phone has found a network andis ready to receive.RPhone No Service:No network is available or themobile phoneis searching for a network.
Accepting a call
If someone calls you when you are in the Telmenu, a display message appears in the mul-tifunction display.You can accept a call at any time, even if youare not in the Tel menu.X Press the6 button on the steeringwheel to accept an incoming call.
Rejecting or ending a callYou can end or reject a call anytime, even ifyou are not in the Tel menu.X Press the~ button on the steeringwheel to reject or end a call.
Selecting an entry in the phone bookX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the9,: ora button toswitch to the phone book.
X Authorize access to the phone book on thephone.
X Press: or9 to select the namesone after the other.
orX To start rapid scrolling: press and holdthe: or9 button for longer thanone second.The names in the phone book are displayedquickly one after the other.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is storedfor a name: press the6 ora buttonto start dialing.
orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.
X Press the9 or: button to select thenumber you want to dial.
X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ing.
orX To exit the telephone book: press the~ or% button.
RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the6 button to switch to theredial memory.
X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.
X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ing.
orX To exit the redial memory: press the~ or% button.
Assistance menu
IntroductionDepending on your vehicle's equipment, inthe Assist. menu, you have the followingoptions:RDisplaying the assistance graphic(Y page 203)RActivating/deactivating COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 203)
202 Menus and submenusOn
-board
computerand
displays
RActivating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSIST (Y page 203)RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist(Y page 203)RActivating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 204)
Displaying the assistance graphic
X Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.
X Press9 or: to select AssistanceGraphic.
X Pressa to confirm your selection.The multifunction display shows theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theassistance graphic.The assistance graphic shows you the sta-tus of and/or information from other driv-ing systems or driving safety systems:RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 176)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS(Y page 62)RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 187)RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 189)
Activating/deactivating COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUSX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.
X Press the9 or: button to selectCollision Prevent. Assist.
X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS is deactivated, theæ symbolappears in the multifunction display in theassistance graphic display.
For further information about COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 62).
Activating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.
X Press the9 or: button to selectAttention Assist.
X Pressa to confirm your selection.The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated,theé symbol appears in the multifunc-tion display in the assistance graphics dis-play.
For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 187).
Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.
X Press the9 or: button to selectBlind Spot Assist.
X Pressa to confirm your selection.The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.
For further information about Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 188)
Menus and submenus 203
On-board
computera
nddisplays
Z
Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.
X Press the9 or: button to selectLane Keeping Assist.
X Pressa to confirm your selection.The current selection appears.
X Pressa again.X Press: or9 to set Off, Standardor Adaptive.
X Press thea button to save the setting.When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, themultifunction display shows the lane mark-ings as bright lines in the assistancegraphic.
For further information about Lane KeepingAssist, see (Y page 189).
Service menu
Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theServ. menu:RCalling up display messages(Y page 211)RRestarting the tire pressure loss warningsystem (Y page 315)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(Y page 316)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 281)
Settings menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, in the Sett. menu you have the fol-lowing options:RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 204)RChanging the light settings (Y page 205)RChanging the vehicle settings(Y page 206)RChanging the convenience settings(Y page 206)RRestoring the factory settings(Y page 207)
Instrument cluster
Selecting the distance unitThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function allows you to choose whether cer-tain displays appear in kilometers or miles inthe multifunction display.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument Cluster submenu.
X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer func-tion.The current setting km or miles appears.
X Press thea button to save the setting.The selected unit of measurement for dis-tance applies to:Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menuRthe odometer and trip odometer
204 Menus and submenusOn
-board
computerand
displays
Rthe trip computerRthe current consumption and the rangeRthe navigation instructions in the NavimenuRcruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display
Selecting permanent displayThe Permanent Display: function allowsyou to choose whether the multifunction dis-play always shows the outside temperature orthe speed in km/h. Canada only: the speed isshown in mph. The speed display is inverse tothe speedometer.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument Cluster submenu.
X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select thePermanent Display: function.The current setting Outside Temperatureor Speedometer [km/h]/Speedometer[mph] appears.
X Press thea button to save the setting.
Lights
Setting the daytime running lampsThis function is not available in Canada.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theLight submenu.
X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the DaytimeRunning Lights function.If the Daytime Running Lights functionhas been switched on, the multifunctiondisplay shows the cone of light and theW symbol in orange.
X Press thea button to save the setting.
Further information on daytime runninglamps (Y page 108).
Setting the brightness of the ambientlightingX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theLight submenu.
X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAmb. Light +/- function.The current setting appears.
X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to adjust thebrightness to a level from Disabled toLevel 5 (bright).
X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.
Activating/deactivating surround light-ing and exterior lighting delayed switch-offX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theLight submenu.
X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the Sur‐round Lighting function.If the Surround Lighting function is acti-vated, the multifunction display shows thelight cone and the area around the vehiclein orange.
X Press thea button to save the setting.
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exte-rior lighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the Smart-Key to position 0 in the ignition lock.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.
Menus and submenus 205
On-board
computera
nddisplays
Z
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start theengine.If you have activated the Surround Light‐ing function and you turn the light switch toÃ, the following functions are activatedwhen it is dark:Rsurround lighting: the exterior lightingremains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the SmartKey. If you start the engine,the surround lighting is switched off andautomatic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 108).Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: theexterior lighting remains lit for 60 secondsafter the engine is switched off. If you closeall the doors and the trunk lid, the exteriorlighting goes off after 15 seconds.
i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and delayedswitch-off exterior lighting are on, the fol-lowing light up:RParking lampsRLow-beam headlampsRDaytime running lampsRSide marker lampsRSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors
Activating/deactivating the interior light-ing delayed switch-offIf you activate the Interior LightingDelay function, the interior lighting remainson for 20 seconds after you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theLight submenu.
X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theInterior Lighting Delay function.If the Interior Lighting Delay functionis activated, the multifunction displayshows the vehicle interior in orange.
X Press thea button to save the setting.
Vehicle
Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismIf you activate the Automatic Door Lockfunction, the vehicle is centrally locked abovea speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicle submenu.
X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAutomatic Door Lock function.When the Automatic door locks func-tion is activated, the multifunction displayshows the left-hand vehicle door in orange.
X Press thea button to save the setting.For further information on the automatic lock-ing feature, see (Y page 79).
Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the Acoustic Lock function,an acoustic signal sounds when you lock thevehicle.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicle submenu.
X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAcoustic Lock function.If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,the multifunction display shows the&symbol in orange.
X Press thea button to save the setting.
Convenience
Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureG WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicle
206 Menus and submenusOn
-board
computera
nddisplays
occupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving.
The adjustment process is stopped.
X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.
X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theEasy Entry/Exit function.If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activa-ted, the multifunction display shows thesteering wheel in orange.
X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature (Y page 101).
Switching the belt adjustment on/offX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.
X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBelt Adjustment function.If the Belt Adjustment function is activa-ted, the multifunction display shows theseat belt in orange.
X Press thea button to save the setting.For further information on belt adjustment,see (Y page 45).
Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-ing feature on/offThis function is only available when the vehi-cle is equippedwith the electrical fold-in func-tion.This function is only available in Canada.When you activate the Auto. Mirror Fold‐ing function, the exterior mirrors are foldedin when the vehicle is locked.If you unlock the vehicle and then open thedriver's or front-passenger door, the exteriormirrors fold out again.If you have switched on the Auto. MirrorFolding function and you fold in the exteriormirrors using the button on the door(Y page 104), they will not fold out automat-ically. The exterior mirrors can then only befolded out using the button on the door.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.
X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAuto. Mirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror Folding function isswitched on, the multifunction displayshows the exterior mirror in orange.
X Press thea button to save the setting.
Restoring the factory settingsX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory Setting submenu.
X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings? functionappears.
Menus and submenus 207
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
X Press the: or9 button to select Noor Yes.
X Press thea button to confirm the selec-tion.If you have selected Yes and confirmed, themultifunction display shows a confirmationmessage.
For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningLights function in the Light submenu is onlyreset if the vehicle is stationary.
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
WARMUP
: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperatureB Transmission fluid temperatureX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AMG menu.
Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP=indicates that the engine has reached theoverrevving range when in the manual driveprogram.Engine and transmission oil temperature:when the engine and transmission are at nor-mal operating temperature, oil tempera-ture? andB are displayed in white in themultifunction display.If the multifunction display shows oil temper-ature? orB in blue, the engine or thetransmission are not yet at normal operatingtemperature. Avoid driving at full engine out-put during this time.
SETUP
: Drive program C, S or M; ESP® mode ON, OFF or SPORT SPORT han-
dling mode
SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®(Electronic Stability Program) mode and theSPORT handling mode.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press9 repeatedly until SETUPappears.
RACETIMER
Displaying and starting RACETIMERThe RACETIMER is only intended for use on aclosed race circuit. Do not use the function onpublic roads.
: Lap; RACETIMERYou can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or if the SmartKey is in posi-tion 2 in the ignition lock.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the9 button repeatedly until theRACETIMER appears.
X To start: press thea button to start theRACETIMER.
208 Menus and submenusOn
-board
computerand
displays
Displaying the intermediate time
X Press the= or; button to selectInterm. Time.
X Pressa to confirm.The intermediate time appears for five sec-onds.
Starting a new lap
: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= LapX Pressa to confirm New Lap.i It is possible to store a maximum of six-teen laps. The 16th lap can only be com-pleted with Finish Lap.
Stopping the RACETIMER
X Press the% button on the steeringwheel.
X Pressa to confirm Yes.The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stopthe vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the key to
position 3 and then pressa to confirmStart, timing is continued.Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER.X Press the= or; button to selectReset Lap.
X Pressa to reset the lap time to "0".
Deleting all laps
If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER isreset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. Ifyou have stopped 16 laps, the current lapdoes not have to be reset.X Reset the current lap.X Pressa to confirm Reset.Reset Race Timer? appears in the multi-function display.
X Press the: button to select Yes andpress thea button to confirm.All laps are deleted.
Overall statistics
: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speed
Menus and submenus 209
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
If you save at least one lap and then stopRACETIMER, an overall evaluation is availa-ble.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the9 button repeatedly until theoverall evaluation appears.
Lap statistics
: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lapThe lap evaluation function is only available ifyou have stored at least two laps and havestopped the RACETIMER.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press9 repeatedly until the lap evalu-ation appears.Each lap appears in a separate submenu.The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-bol:.
X Press the9 or: button to select adifferent lap evaluation.
210 Menus and submenusOn
-board
computera
nddisplays
Display messages
Introduction
General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator'sManual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.Please respond in accordancewith the displaymessages and follow the additional notes in thisOperator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 179)RParking (Y page 160)
Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel.The multifunction display hides the display message.
High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-pri-ority display messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-sages have been remedied.
Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain displaymessages in themessagememory. You can callup the display messages:X Press the= or; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.
X Press the9 or: button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to scroll through the display messages.When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
Display messages 211
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
!÷Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐tor's Manual
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hillstart assist are temporarily unavailable.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Possible causes are:Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual
ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill startassist are unavailable due to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.The$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only), ÷, å and !warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.
212 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM SolutionsThe steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐tor's Manual
ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist aretemporarily unavailable.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 213
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual
ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist areunavailable due to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
T!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual
EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable dueto a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
214 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
F(USA
only)!(Canadaonly)Turn On the Igni‐tion to Releasethe Parking Brake
The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamplights up.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni-tion was switched off.X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.
F(USA
only)!(Canadaonly)Please ReleaseParking Brake
The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automaticrelease of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 161).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake manually.
The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and a warning tone sounds.You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking(Y page 161).
F(USA
only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake SeeOperator's Manual
The yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.X Shift the selector lever to position P.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow! warning lamp and the redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.orX Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 161).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 215
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and the yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.To apply:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lampcontinues to flash:X Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 331).X Shift the selector lever to position P.X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten sec-onds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released.It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake.
If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:X Shift the selector lever to position P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 161).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
216 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
The yellow! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply orrelease the electric parking brake, the redF (USAonly) or!(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible toapply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the selector lever to P, as the electric parking brake is notapplied automatically.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
F(USA
only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake Inop‐erative
The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten sec-onds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released.It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-voltage or undervoltage.X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. bycharging the battery or restarting the engine.
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parkingbrake:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow! warning lamp lights up and the redF (USAonly) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the selector lever to position P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 217
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
$(USA
only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidLevel
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) warninglamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tonesounds.
G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
#Check Brake PadWear
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
GInoperative
One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunc-tioning.X Have the mbrace system checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.
PRE-SAFE Inopera‐tive See Opera‐tor's Manual
Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
218 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Collision Preven‐tion Assist PlusCurrently Unavail‐able See Opera‐tor's Manual
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not opera-tional. Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Restart the engine.
Collision Preven‐tion Assist PlusInoperative
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperativedue to a malfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 219
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Radar SensorsDirty See Opera‐tor's Manual
At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety sys-tems is temporarily restricted or inoperative:RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSRDISTRONIC PLUSPossible causes are:Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirtyRthe function of the driving system and/or driving safety systemis impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears. All driving systems and driving safety systemsare operative again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Switch off the engine.X Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 285):Rin the radiator trimRin the front bumperRin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rearbumper
X Restart the engine.The display message disappears.
6SRS MalfunctionService Required
The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lightsup in the instrument cluster.
G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.For further information about the restraint system, see(Y page 40).
220 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
6Front Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequiredorFrontRight MalfunctionService Required
The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left orright. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-ter.
G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
6Left Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionServiceRequiredorRightSide Curtain Air‐bag MalfunctionService Required
There is amalfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand head bag.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G WARNINGThe left or right head bag may either be triggered unintentionallyor, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 221
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Front PassengerAirbag DisabledSee Operator's Man‐ual
The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag aredeactivated during the journey, although:Ran adultorRa person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passengerseat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may inter-pret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bagmay not be triggered in the event of an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ONindicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approx-imately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then lightup and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabledthe front-passenger front air bag (Y page 49)Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in themultifunction display
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-tem checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-tifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ONindicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS clas-sifies the occupant.
222 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM SolutionsIf the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-rectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 49).
Front PassengerAirbag Enabled SeeOperator's Manual
The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag areenabled during the journey, even though:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sys-tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seatorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe automatic front-passenger front air bag deactivation systemmay detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight appliedto the seat.
G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger kneebag may be triggered unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight andinterpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actuallyis.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ONindicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approx-imately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then lightup and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant
Display messages 223
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM SolutionsClassification System) has disabled the front-passenger frontair bag (Y page 49)Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in themultifunction display
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-tem checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-tifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ONindicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS clas-sifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-rectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 49).
Lightsi Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters:The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all of the LEDs in thelamp have failed.
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
bCheck Left Corner‐ing Light or CheckRight CorneringLight
The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).
orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Left LowBeam or CheckRight Low Beam
The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).
orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
224 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
bCheck Rear LeftTurn Signal orCheck Rear RightTurn Signal
The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).
orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Front LeftTurn Signal orCheck Front RightTurn Signal
The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).
orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Left MirrorTurn Signal orCheck Right MirrorTurn Signal
The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isdefective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Center BrakeLamp
The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Left BrakeLamporCheck RightBrake Lamp
The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Left Tailand Brake Lamps orCheck Right Tailand Brake Lamps
The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Left HighBeamorCheck RightHigh Beam
The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).
orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bLicense Plate Lamp
The left or right-hand license plate lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 225
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
bRear Fog Lamp
The rear fog lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Front LeftStandingLamporCheck FrontRight Standing Lamp
The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).
orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bBackup Light
The backup lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).
orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Front LeftSidemarker Lamp orCheck Front RightSidemarker Lamp
The front left-hand or front right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Rear LeftSidemarker Lamp orCheck Rear RightSidemarker Lamp
The rear left-hand or rear right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Left DaytimeRunningLightorCheck RightDaytime RunningLight
The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).
orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bActive HeadlampsInoperative
The active light function is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bMalfunction SeeOperator's Manual
The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
226 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
bAuto Lamp FunctionInoperative
The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bSwitch Off Lights
You leave the vehicle and the light is still switched on. A warningtone also sounds.X Turn the light switch to positionÃ.
Adaptive HighbeamAssist Inoperative
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive HighbeamAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoper-ative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, theAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now Availablemessage appears.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Engine
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
+Check CoolantLevel See Opera‐tor's Manual
The coolant level is too low.
! Avoidmaking long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 279).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.
? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun-tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
Display messages 227
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
?Coolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnEngine Off
The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes outand the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Other-wise, the engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
#See Operator's Man‐ual
The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronics
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
228 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
#Stop Vehicle SeeOperator's Manual
The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge levelis too low.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Observe the instructions in the display message# SeeOperator's Manual.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
4Check Engine OilAt Next Refueling
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 277).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 278).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop ifyou need to add engine oil more often than usual.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
4Check Engine OilLevel (Add 1 quart)
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 277).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 278).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop ifyou need to add engine oil more often than usual.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Display messages 229
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
4Engine Oil LevelStop Vehicle TurnEngine Off
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.There is a risk of engine damage.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Check the engine oil level (Y page 277).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 278).
8Fuel Level Low
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
8Gas Cap Loose
The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
ÀAttention Assist:Take a Break!
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigueor a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tonealso sounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.
ÀAttention AssistInoperative
ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ëOff
The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 179).
230 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Lane KeepingAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual
Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period.Rthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Clean the windshield.
Lane KeepingAssist Inoperative
Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot AssistCurrently Unavail‐able See Opera‐tor's Manual
Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe sensors are dirty.Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-rors.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Clean the sensors (Y page 285).X Restart the engine.
Display messages 231
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Blind Spot AssistInoperative
Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-rors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking GuidanceInoperative
Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 184).X Restart the engine.If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking GuidanceCanceled
Parking Guidance is deactivated. Possible causes are:RThe vehicle is skidding.Rthe sensors are dirty.Ra malfunction has occurred.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate Parking Guidance later (Y page 184).If the multifunction display does not show the parking space sym-bol at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h):X Clean the sensors (Y page 285).X Restart the engine.If the multifunction display still does not show the parking spacesymbol at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h):X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longerfollowing the recommended path.X Park again and, while doing so, observe the display messages inthe multifunction display.
Parking GuidanceFinished
The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically.
DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 170).If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS NowAvailable
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 170).
232 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐rently UnavailableSee Operator's Man‐ual
DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.RThe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Restart the engine.
DISTRONIC PLUSInoperative
DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐pended
You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS - -- mph
An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 170).
Cruise ControlInoperative
Cruise control is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control - -- mph
A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), forexample.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) andstore the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 168).
Display messages 233
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Tires
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Check Tire Pres‐sure Soon
Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significantloss in pressure.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes:Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or instal-led new wheels and tires.Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped
G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 291).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pres-sure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tirepressure is correct (Y page 315).
Check Tire Pres‐sure Then RestartRun Flat Indicator
Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display mes-sage and has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 315).
Run Flat IndicatorInoperative
Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
234 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Please CorrectTire Pressure
The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 316).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 318).
Tire Pressure Soon The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 291).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 316).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Warning Tire Mal‐function
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNINGDriving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 291).
Display messages 235
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Tire Press. Moni‐tor CurrentlyUnavailable
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves,no signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tirepressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been resolved.
TirePress. Sen‐sor(s) Missing
There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire does not appear in themultifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
Tire Pressure Mon‐itor InoperativeNo Wheel Sensors
The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after drivingfor a few minutes.
Tire Press. Moni‐tor Inoperative
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Shift to 'P' or'N' to Start Engine
You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.
Apply Brake toShift from 'P'
You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever toposition D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.
To Deselect P orN, Depress Brakeand Start Engine
With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift thetransmission out of position P or N into another transmissionposition.X Depress the brake pedal.X Start the engine.
236 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Transmission Notin P Risk of Vehi‐cle Rolling Away
The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmissionis in position R, N or D.A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNINGThe vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Close the driver's door completely.
Only Shift to 'P'when Vehicle isStationary
The vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
Service RequiredDo Not Shift GearsVisit Dealer
You cannot change the transmission position due to amalfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting thetransmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Reversing Not Pos‐sible ServiceRequired
You cannot shift into the transmission position R due to a mal-function.The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal‐function Stop
A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission com-ponents.A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts toposition N.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.
X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Display messages 237
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Auxiliary BatteryMalfunction
The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longerbeing charged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.X Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switchoff the engine.
X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
N The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid.
M The hood is open.
G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Close the hood.
C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.
ÐPower Steering Mal‐function See Oper‐ator's Manual
The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.
JTrunk PartitionOpen
The trunk partition is open.X Close the trunk partition (Y page 89).
238 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbolappears in the multifunction display.
KDecrease Speed
You wanted to open the roof while the vehicle was in motion.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.
X Open the roof (Y page 87).
KVario-Roof Lower‐ing
The roof is not fully opened or closed. The hydraulics are depres-surized.X Fully open or close the roof (Y page 87).
KOpen/Close Vario-Roof Completely
The roof is not locked.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.
X Push or pull and hold the roof switch until the roof is fully openor closed (Y page 87).
KStart Engine SeeOperator's Manual
The on-board voltage is too low.X Start the engine.X After approximately ten seconds, repeat the opening or closingprocedure (Y page 87).
The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. Theroof drive has been switched off automatically for safety reasons.You can open and close the roof again after approximately tenminutes.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 87).
Close Rear SideWindows
You leave the vehicle and at least one rear side window is open.X Close the side windows (Y page 84).
¥Check Washer Fluid
The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 279).
Display messages 239
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Wiper Malfunction‐ing
The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Hazard WarningFlashers Malfunc‐tioning
The hazard warning lamps are faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
SmartKey
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
ÂKey Does NotBelong to Vehicle
You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.
ÂTake Your Key fromIgnition
The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.
ÂObtain a New Key
The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ÂReplace Key Battery
The SmartKey battery is discharged.X Change the battery (Y page 75).
ÂDon't Forget YourKey
The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened thedriver's door with the engine switched off.The multifunction display shows the display message a maximumof 60 seconds and is simply a reminder.X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
ÂKey Not Detected(red display message)
The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehiclecentrally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Locate the SmartKey.X Pressa on the steering wheel to confirm the display mes-sage.
240 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves,the key is not detected whilst the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into keymode.
ÂKey Not Detected(white display mes-sage)
The SmartKey is currently undetected.X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to thedesired position.
ÂRemove 'Start' But‐ton and Insert Key
The SmartKey is continually undetected.KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warn-ing tone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to thedesired position.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps
General notesSome systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, someindicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical.These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash afterstarting the engine or whilst driving.
Warning and indicator lamps 241
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Safety
Seat belts
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
ü
After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup for 6 seconds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passengerto fasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).
ü
After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup. In addition, a warn-ing tone sounds for upto 6 seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).The warning tone ceases.
ü
The red seat belt warn-ing lamp lights up afterthe engine starts, assoon as the driver's orthe front-passengerdoor is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.
ü
The red seat belt warn-ing lamp flashes and anintermittent audiblewarning sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Thevehicle is being driven faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or has brieflybeen driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is beingdriven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.
242 Warning and indicator lampsOn
-board
computerand
displays
Safety systems
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning. A warning tonealso sounds.
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the mal-function.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.
!
The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunc-tion. Therefore, BAS (Brake Assist), COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), PRE‑SAFE®,the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are also deac-tivated.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.
X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that othersystems, such as the navigation system or the automatic trans-mission, will not be available.
Warning and indicator lamps 243
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
!
The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.
ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS, ESP®, EBD (electronic brake force distribution),PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example,are therefore also deactivated.Possible causes are:Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.
X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
244 Warning and indicator lampsOn
-board
computerand
displays
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
!
The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.
EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS,ESP®, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®, theHOLD function and hill-start assist are also not available, forexample.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.
X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
$ (USA only)J (Canada only)÷ å !
The red brake warninglamp, the yellow ESP®and ESP® OFF warninglamps and the yellowABS warning lamp arelit while the engine isrunning.
ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore,BAS, EBD, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®,the HOLD function and hill-start assist, for example, are not avail-able either.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.
X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps 245
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
÷
The yellow ESP® warn-ing lamp flashes whilethe vehicle is in motion.
ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 66) , it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 66).
å
The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.
ESP® is deactivated.
G WARNING
If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restric-ted.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 66) , it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 66).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
M
Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles only:The yellow SPORT han-dling mode warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.
SPORT handling mode is activated.
G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Only switch on SPORT handling mode in certain situations(Y page 67).
246 Warning and indicator lampsOn
-board
computerand
displays
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
÷ å
The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.
ESP®, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®,the HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to amalfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.
X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
÷ å
The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.
ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist aretemporarily unavailable.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.
X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps 247
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
F (USA only)! (Canada only)The red electric parkingbrake indicator lampflashes or lights upand/or!
the yellow warninglamp for the electricparking brake lights up.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.
6
The red restraint sys-tem warning lamp is litwhile the engine is run-ning.
The restraint system is faulty.
G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Drive on carefully.X Have the restraint system checked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
For further information about the restraint system, see(Y page 40).
248 Warning and indicator lampsOn
-board
computerand
displays
Engine
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
;
The yellow CheckEngine warning lamplights up while theengine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the enginemay bein emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified special-ist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamplights up. This depends on the locally applicable legal require-ments. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply inthe state in which you are currently driving.
8
The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine is run-ning.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
8
The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion.In addition, the;Check Engine warninglamp may light up.
The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel fillercap.
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist work-shop.
?
The red coolant warn-ing lamp lights up whilethe engine is runningand the coolant tem-perature gage is at thestart of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defec-tive.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is arisk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continuedriving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps 249
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
?
The red coolant warn-ing lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning.
The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormaybe blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunc-tioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warningnotes (Y page 279).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine coolingsystem checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature isbelow248‡ (120†). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun-tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
?
The red coolant warn-ing lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning. A warning tonealso sounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The air-flow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the coolant levelmaybe too low.
G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).
250 Warning and indicator lampsOn
-board
computera
nddisplays
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM SolutionsX Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warningnotes (Y page 279).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine coolingsystem checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun-tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
·
The red distance warn-ing lamp lights up whilethe vehicle is in motion.A warning tone alsosounds.
You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your lineof travel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have tobrake or take evasive action.
Observe the additional information on DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 170).Observe the additional information on COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS (Y page 203).
Warning and indicator lamps 251
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Tires
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
h
The yellow combinationlow tire pressure tell-tale/TPMSmalfunctiontelltale for the TPMS(pressure loss or mal-function) is lit.
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in atleast one of the tires.
G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 160).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 291).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 316).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
h
The yellow combinationlow tire pressure tell-tale/TPMSmalfunctiontelltale for the TPMS(pressure loss or mal-function) flashes forapproximately oneminute and thenremains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tirepressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
252 Warning and indicator lampsOn
-board
computera
nddisplays
Useful information ............................ 254Stowage areas ................................... 254Features ............................................. 256
253
Stow
ageandfeatures
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).
Stowage areas
Stowage spaces
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-ing or abruptly changing directions.RAlways store objects so that they cannot beflung around in these or in similar situa-tions.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage compartments, parcelnets or stowage nets.RClose lockable stowage compartmentswhile driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the trunk.
Glove box
X Toopen: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.
X To close: fold glove box flap; upwardsuntil it engages.
The glove box flap contains brackets forcoins, pens, and credit and service cards.
The glove box can be locked and unlockedusing the mechanical key.X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it to position2.
X To unlock: insert the mechanical key intothe lock and turn it to position1.
254 Stowage areasStow
ageandfeatures
Stowage compartment/telephonecompartment under the armrest
X To open: push button: up and raise arm-rest;.
The stowage compartment can be locked andunlocked centrally using the SmartKey(Y page 72).
i Depending on the vehicle equipment, a12 V power socket, USB port or a MediaInterface is installed in the stowage com-partment. A Media Interface is a universalinterface for mobile audio equipment, e.g.for an iPod® or MP3 player (see the sepa-rate COMAND Operating Instructions).
Eyeglasses compartment
X To open: press marking:.Make sure that the eyeglasses compartmentis always closedwhile the vehicle is inmotion.
Stowage compartment in the centerconsole
X To open: briefly press the lower section ofcover:.
X To remove the insert: pull the left-handside of the insert up and out.
X To install the insert: press the insert intothe housing.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, theremay be an ashtray in the center consoleinstead of a storage compartment.
Stowage compartment in the doors
In the door trim, there is a ruffled pocket;with storage slot:.
Stowage box in the rear wall betweenthe seatsA ruffled pocket is located on the rear wallbetween the seats.
Stowage areas 255
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
: Ruffled pocket
Stowage netStowage nets are located in the front-passenger footwell and on the rear wallbehind the driver's seat.
Reversible floor panel in the trunkUsing the flat side of the reversible floor panelwill give you a level trunk. If you turn thereversible floor panel over, you can transportobjects, for example a drinks crate, on it.
X To turn over: pull up reversible floorpanel; using strap:.
X Turn over reversible floor panel; and re-insert it.
Attached to the reversible floor panel are twoflexible straps; that you can use to secureobjects, for example wind screen=, whenreversible floor panel: has been turnedover.
Roof carrier! This vehicle is not designed to transportitems on the roof. Roof carriers and otherdevices which aremounted on the roof thathave not been specifically approved for thismodel by Mercedes-Benz must not be usedas they could damage the vehicle and theretractable hardtop (vario-roof).At the time of going to print, Mercedes-Benz does not offer any roof carrier or otherroof-installed devices for this model.
! This vehicle is not designed to transportany items on the trunk lid or to allow lug-gage carriers or equipment of any kind tobe installed to the trunk lid. Otherwise thevehicle and the retractable hardtop couldbe damaged.
Features
Cup holder
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.
256 FeaturesStow
ageandfeatures
There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-ing or abruptly changing directions.RAlways store objects so that they cannot beflung around in these or in similar situa-tions.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage compartments, parcelnets or stowage nets.RClose lockable stowage compartmentswhile driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the trunk.
! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. Thedrinks could otherwise spill.
! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cupholder in the center console to continuous,strong and direct sunlight. The passengercompartment in the area of the center con-sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-centrated and reflected sunlight.
Cup holder in the center console
X To open: slide cover; back.X To remove the insert: slide catch:inwards on both sides in the direction of thearrow.
X Remove the cup holder insert upwards.X To re-install the insert: place the insert inthe stowage space.
X Slide catch: outwards in the direction ofthe arrow until it engages.
You can remove the cup holder insert forcleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm wateronly.
Bottle holderObserve the "Important safety notes" in the"Stowage compartments" section(Y page 254).
! Make sure that any bottles weighingmorethan 1.1 lb(0.5 kg) that are stored in thebottle holder, rest on the vehicle floor. Thebottle holder could otherwise be damaged.
X Press the outer edge of button: and slidein the direction of the arrow until the bottlefits into the opening.
X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder.The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with acapacity of 25 fl. oz. (0.7 l) to 54 fl. oz. (1.5 l).The bottle holder does not secure the bottles;it merely prevents them from tipping over.
Sun visors
Overview
G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.
Features 257
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining strip, e.g. for a parking lot ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover
i When driving at high speeds with the sidewindow or roof open:If you have inserted a car park ticket intoretaining strip=, make sure that it is notblown away by the wind.
Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visoris clipped into bracket; andmirror coverAhas been folded up.
Glare from the sideX Fold down the sun visor.X Pull the sun visor out of retainer;.X Swing the sun visor to the side.X Slide the sun visor horizontally as desired.
Ashtray
X To open: push the lower section ofcover:.The cover opens.
X To remove the insert: lift insert= up;and out.
X To re-install the insert: press insert=into the holder until it engages.
Cigarette lighter
G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.
258 FeaturesStow
ageandfeatures
Your attentionmust always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarettelighter when road and traffic conditions per-mit.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
X To open: push the lower section ofcover:.The ashtray opens.
X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter; will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.
12 V sockets
General notes
! If you are using all sockets in the vehicle,make sure that you do not exceed the max-imum current draw of 55 A. Otherwise, youwill overload the fuses.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
The sockets can be used for accessories witha maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso-ries include such items as chargers formobilephones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.
i An emergency cut-out ensures that theon-board voltage does not drop too low. Ifthe on-board voltage is too low, the powerto the sockets is automatically cut. This
ensures that there is sufficient power tostart the engine.
Socket under the armrest
X Open the stowage compartment under thearmrest (Y page 255).
X Lift up the cover of socket:.On vehicleswithout ashtrays or lighters, thereis an additional socket in the center console.
Socket in the front-compartment centerconsole
X To open: push the lower section ofcover:.The stowage compartment opens.
X Lift up the cover of socket;.
mbrace
General notesYou must have a license agreement to acti-vate the mbrace service. Make sure that your
Features 259
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
system is activated and operational. To log in,press the ï MB Info call button. If any ofthe steps mentioned are not carried out, thesystem may not be activated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephone hot-lines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367
Shortly after successfully registering with theservice, a user ID and passwordwill be sent toyou by post.USA only: you can use this password to logonto the mbrace area under "Owners Online"at http://www.mbusa.com.The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe correspondingmobile phone network isavailable for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer CenterRa service subscription is availableRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged
i Determining the location of the vehicle ona map is only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded tothe Customer Assistance Center.
The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceed asfollows:X Press theW orX button on the mul-tifunction steering wheel.
orX Use the volume controller of the audio sys-tem/COMAND.
The system offers various services, e.g.:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callUSA only: you can find information and adescription of all available features under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has been detec-ted if one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button doesnot come on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info callbutton does not light up during self-diag-nosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in one or more of thefollowing buttons continues to light up redafter the system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRAfter the system self-diagnosis, the Inop‐erative or Service Not Activatedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlinedabove, the systemmay not operate as expec-ted. In the event of an emergency, help willhave to be summoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367
260 FeaturesStow
ageandfeatures
Emergency call
Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions
There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.Move to a safe location along with other vehi-cle occupants. In such situations, secure thevehicle in accordance with national regula-tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.
You must have a license agreement to acti-vate the mbrace service. Make sure that yoursystem is activated and operational. To reg-ister, press the ï MB Info call button. Ifany of the steps mentioned are not carriedout, the system may not be activated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephone hot-lines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367
General notesAnemergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered.
i You cannot end an automatically trig-gered emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.
As soon as the emergency call has been ini-tiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The multifunction display shows theConnecting Call message.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, theCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.All important information on the emergency istransmitted, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as deter-mined by the GPS system)Rvehicle identification numberRinformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has been ini-tiated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the Customer Assis-tance Center and the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter attempts to getmore information on theemergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicleoccupants, an ambulance is immediatelysent to the vehicle.
If no voice connection can be established tothe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter, the systemhas been unable to initiatean emergency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. Theindicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con-tinuously.The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display and must be confirmed.In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.
Features 261
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
Making an emergency call
X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover: briefly to open.
X Press SOS button; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button;flashes until the emergency call is conclu-ded.
X Wait for a voice connection to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter.
X After the emergency call, close cover:.
i If the mobile phone network is unavaila-ble, mbrace will not be able to make theemergency call. If you leave the vehicleimmediately after pressing the SOS button,you will not know whether mbrace placedthe emergency call. In this case, alwayssummon assistance by other means.
Roadside Assistance button
X Press Roadside Assistance button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active.The multifunction display shows the Con‐necting Callmessage. The audio outputis muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nectedmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification number
i The audio system or COMAND displayindicates that a call is active. During thecall, you can change to the navigationmenuby pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,for example.Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.From the remote malfunction diagnosis, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercan ascertain the nature of the problem(Y page 266).The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements foryour vehicle to be transported to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.You may be charged for services such asrepair work and/or towing.Further details are available in your mbracemanual.
i The system has not been able to initiate aRoadside Assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assis-tance call button: is flashing continu-ously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.
262 FeaturesStow
ageandfeatures
This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display.
X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.
orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.
MB Info call button
X Press MB Info call button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp inMB Info call button:flasheswhile the connection is beingmade.The multifunction display shows the Con‐necting Callmessage. The audio systemis muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nectedmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification number
i The audio system or COMAND displayindicates that a call is active. During thecall, you can change to the navigationmenu
by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,for example.Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.USA only: you can find further information onthe mbrace system under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.
i The system has not been able to initiatean MB Info call, if:Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call but-ton: is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display.
X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.
orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.
Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, an emer-gency call will take priority and override allother active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated bythe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.
Features 263
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on themultifunction steer-ing wheelRthe corresponding button on the audio sys-tem or on COMAND for ending a telephonecall
i When a call is initiated, the audio systemis muted. The mobile phone is no longerconnected to COMAND. However, if youwant to use your mobile phone, do so onlywhen the vehicle is stationary and in a safelocation.
Downloading destinations in COMAND
Downloading destinationsDownloading destinations gives you accessto a database with over 15 million points ofinterest (POIs). These can be downloaded onthe navigation system in your vehicle. If youknow the destination, the address can bedownloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain thelocation of Points of Interest (POIs)/impor-tant destinations in the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes withup to 20 way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.X Select Yes with the= or; buttonson the COMAND system.
X Confirm with the 9 button on theCOMAND system.
The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.
i If you select No, the address can be savedin the address book.
i The destination download function isavailable if the relevant mobile phone net-work is available and data transfer is pos-sible.
i The destination download function canonly be used if the vehicle is equipped witha navigation system.
Route AssistanceThis service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack-age and cannot be purchased separately.
i You can also use the Route Assistancefunction if your vehicle is not equipped witha navigation system.
Within the framework of this service, youreceive a professional and reliable form ofnavigation support without having to leaveyour vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle'scurrent position and the desired destination.You will then be guided live through the cur-rent route section.
Search and Send
General notesi To use "Search & Send", your vehiclemust be equipped with mbrace and a navi-gation system. Additionally, an mbrace ser-vice subscription must be completed.
"Search & Send" is a destination entry ser-vice. A destination address which is found onGoogle Maps® can be transferred via mbracedirectly to your vehicle's navigation system.
Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://www.maps.google.com and enter a desti-nation address into the entry field.
X To send the destination address to thee-mail address of your mbrace account:click on the corresponding button on thewebsite.i Example:If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination addresswill be sent to your vehicle.
X When the "Send" dialog window appears:
264 FeaturesStow
ageandfeatures
Enter the e-mail address you specifiedwhen setting up your mbrace account intothe corresponding field.
X Click "Send".
i Information on specific commands suchas "Address entry" or "Send" can be foundon the website.
Calling up destination addressesX Switch on the ignition.The destination address is loaded into thevehicle's navigation system.A display message appears, askingwhether navigation should be started.
X Select Yes by turning cVd or sliding XVYthe COMAND controller and pressW toconfirm.The system calculates the route and sub-sequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.
i If you select No, the address can be savedin the address book.
i If you have sent more than one destina-tion address, each individual destinationmust be confirmed separately.
i Destination addresses are loaded in thesame order as the order in which they weresent.If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles with mbrace and activated mbraceaccounts:If multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination willbe sent to all the vehicles.
Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle anda replacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote unlock-
ingmay be delayed by 15 to 60minutes. After30 days, the vehicle can no longer be openedremotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your password.X Return to your vehicle at the time agreedupon with the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can beopened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone®,Android)
To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.
i Vehicle remote opening is only possible ifthe correspondingmobile phone network isaccessible.
Vehicle remote closingThe valet locking feature can be used whenyou have forgotten to lock the vehicle and youare no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.The vehicle can be immediately remotelylocked within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, remote closingmaybe delayed by 15 to 60minutes. After 30 daysthe vehicle can no longer be locked remotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your password.
Features 265
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
The next time you are inside the vehicle andyou switch on the ignition, the DoorsLocked Remotely message appears in themultifunction display.USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can belocked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone®,Android)
To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.
i The vehicle remote closing feature isavailable when the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data connection ispossible.
Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.
X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter together with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter contacts you and the local law enforce-ment agency if the vehicle is located.However, only the law enforcement agencyis informed of the location of the vehicle.
i If the anti-theft alarm system is activatedfor longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center is auto-matically notified.
Vehicle Health CheckWith the Vehicle Health Check, the CustomerAssistance Center can provide improved sup-port for problemswith your vehicle. During anexisting call, vehicle data is transferred to theCustomer Assistance Center. The customerservice representative can use the received
data to decide what kind of assistance isrequired. You are then, for example, guided tothe nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter or a recovery vehicle is called.If vehicle data needs to be transferred duringan MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,this is initiated by the Customer AssistanceCenter. You will see the Roadside Assis‐tance Connected message in the COMANDdisplay. If the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis can be started, the Request forvehicle diagnosis received. Startvehicle diagnosis? message appears inthe display.X Confirm the message with Yes.X When the Vehicle Diagnosis Pleasestart ignition message appears, turnthe SmartKey to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 139).
X When the Please follow the instruc‐tions received by phone and moveyour vehicle to a safe positionmessage appears, follow the customer ser-vice representative's instructions.The message in the display disappears.If you select Cancel the remote malfunc-tion diagnosis is canceled completely.The vehicle operating state check begins.You will see the Vehicle diagnosisactivated message.
When the diagnosis is completed, the Trans‐fer vehicle diagnostics data (Voiceconnection may be interrupted dur‐ing data transfer)message appears. Thevehicle data can now be sent to the CustomerAssistance center.X Press OK to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance Center is terminated.You will see the Vehicle diagnosis:Transferring data... message.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance Center.
Depending on what the customer service rep-resentative agreed with you, the voice con-
266 FeaturesStow
ageandfeatures
nection is re-established after the transfer iscomplete. If necessary, you will be contactedat a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone.Another function of the Vehicle Health Checkis the transfer of service data to the CustomerAssistance Center. If a service is overdue, theCOMAND display shows a message aboutvarious special offers at your workshop.USA only: this information can also be calledup under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 27).Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 23).
Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transferand save predefined routes in the navigationsystem. To do this, an SD memory card mustbe inserted into the COMAND system. If noSD memory card is inserted, you must insertthe card into the card slot on the COMANDsystem before saving.A route can be prepared and sent either by acustomer service representative or via thembrace portal on the Internet.Each route can include up to 20 way points.Once a route has been received by the navi-gation system, you will see the <routename> has been saved to memory card.Do you want to start route guidance?message in the COMANDdisplay. The route issaved to the SD memory card.X To start route guidance: select Yes.An overview of the route is shown in thedisplay.i If you select No, the saved route can becalled up later via the navigation menu.
X Select Start.Route guidance is started.
i Downloaded and saved data can be calledup again in COMAND.
You can find further information in the sep-arate COMAND Operating Instructions.
Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehi-cle, a message will be sent to the CustomerAssistance Center. The Customer AssistanceCenter then forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receivethis information beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit wasexceededRthe time at which the speed limit wasexceededRthe selected speed limit which was excee-ded
Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areas whichthe vehicle should not enter or leave. You willbe informed if the vehicle crosses the boun-daries of the selected areas. You can selectthe way in which you receive this informationbeforehand. Possible options include textmessage, e-mail or an automated call.The area can be determined as either a circleor a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.You can specify up to ten areas simultane-ously. Different settings are possible for eacharea.USA only: these settings can be called upunder "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info calland inform the customer service representa-tive that you wish to activate geo fencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated bytext message.
Features 267
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger the vehi-cle's panic alarm via text message. An alarmsounds and the exterior lighting flashes.Depending on the setting, the panic alarmlasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, thealarm switches off.
Garage door opener
General notes
The HomeLink® garage door opener integra-ted in the rear-viewmirror allows you to oper-ate up to three different door and gate sys-tems.Use the integrated garage door opener onlyon garage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsOnce programed, the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-viewmirror will assume thefunction of the garage door system's remotecontrol. Please also read the operatinginstructions for the garage door system.When programming a garage door opener,park the vehicle outside the garage. Do notrun the engine while programming.Certain garage door drives are incompatiblewith the integrated garage door opener. If youhave difficulty programing the integratedgarage door opener, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the following tele-phone assistance services:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (freeof charge)
More information on HomeLink® and/orcompatible products is also available onlineat http://www.homelink.com.
Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 25).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.
G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.
Programming
Programing buttonsPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 268).
Garage door remote controlA is not inclu-ded with the integrated garage door opener.
268 FeaturesStow
ageandfeatures
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
X Select one of buttons; to? to use tocontrol the garage door drive.
X To start programing mode: press andhold one of buttons; to? on the inte-grated garage door opener.The garage door opener is now in program-ing mode. After a short time, indicatorlamp: lights up yellow.Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soonas button;,= or? is programed for thefirst time. If the selected button has alreadybeen programed, indicator lamp: willonly light up yellow after ten seconds haveelapsed.
X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.
X To program the remote control: pointgarage door remote controlA towardsbuttons; to? on the rear-view mirror ata distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm).
X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green:programing is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-graming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code (Y page 269).
X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprograming procedure for the correspond-ing button on the rear-view mirror. Whendoing so, vary the distance between remotecontrolA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might be neces-sary. You should test every position for atleast 25 seconds before trying anotherposition.
Synchronizing the rolling codePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 268).
If the garage door system uses a rolling code,you will also have to synchronize the garagedoor system with the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror. To do this youwill need to use the programing button on thecontrol panel of the door drive. The program-ing button may be positioned in different pla-ces depending on the manufacturer. It is usu-ally located on the door drive unit on thegarage ceiling.Familiarize yourself with the garage doordrive operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro-graming of additional remote controls",before carrying out the following steps.Your vehicle must be within reach of thegarage door or gate opener drive. Make surethat neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of thedoor or gate.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
X Get out of the vehicle.X Press the programing button on the doordrive unit.Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini-tiate the next step.
Features 269
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
X Get into the vehicle.X Press previously programed button;,=or? on the integrated garage door openerrepeatedly until the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.
Notes on programing the remote controlCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmissionsignals after broadcasting for a few seconds.Therefore, these signals may not last longenough for the integrated garage dooropener. The signal is not recognized duringprograming. Comparable with Canadian law,someU.S. garage door openers also feature a"break".Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programing thegarage door opener (regardless of whereyou live) when using the programing steps.
X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.
X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.
X Press buttonB of garage door remotecontrolA for two seconds, then release itfor two seconds.
X Press buttonB again for two seconds.
X Repeat this sequence on buttonB ofremote controlA until indicator lamp:lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green:programing is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-graming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code.
X Release buttonB of remote controlA ofthe garage door drive.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprograming process for the correspondingbutton on the rear-viewmirror. When doingso, vary the distance between remote con-trolA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might be neces-sary. You should test every position for atleast 25 seconds before trying anotherposition.
Problems when programing
If you experience problems programing theintegrated garage door opener on the rear-viewmirror, take note of the following instruc-tions:RCheck the transmitter frequency used bygarage door drive remote controlA andwhether it is supported. The transmitterfrequency can usually be found on the backof the garage door drive remote control.The integrated garage door opener is com-patible with devices that have units which
270 FeaturesStow
ageandfeatures
operate in the frequency range of 280 to433 MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage doorremote controlA. This increases the like-lihood that garage door remote controlAwill transmit a strong and precise signal tothe integrated garage door opener.RWhen programing, hold remote controlAat varying distances and angles from thebutton which you are programing. Try vari-ous angles at a distance between 2and12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same anglebut at varying distances.RIf another remote control is available for thesame garage door drive, repeat the sameprograming steps with this remote control.Before performing these steps, make surethat new batteries have been installed ingarage door drive remote controlA.RNote that some remote controls only trans-mit for a limited amount of time (the indi-cator lamp on the remote control goes out).Press buttonB on remote controlA againbefore transmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signal recep-tion/transmission.
Opening/closing the garage door
After it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function ofthe garage door system remote control.Please also read the operating instructionsfor the garage door system.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
X Press button;,= or? which you haveprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-cator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code:indicator lamp: flashes green.The transmitter will transmit a signal aslong as the button is pressed. The trans-mission is halted after a maximum of tenseconds and indicator lamp: lights upyellow.
X Press button;,= or? again if neces-sary.
Clearing the memory
Make sure that you clear the memory of theintegrated garage door opener before sellingthe vehicle.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
X Press and hold buttons; and?.The indicator lamp initially lights up yellowand then green.
X Release buttons; and?.The memory of the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
Features 271
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
Compass
Calling up the compass
Compass; displays the compass directionin which the vehicle is currently traveling: N,NE, E, SE, S, SW, W or NW.To receive a correct display in rear-view mir-ror:, the compass must be calibrated andthe magnetic field zone set.
Setting the compass
North America zone map
South America zone mapX Set your location using the zone maps.
272 FeaturesStow
ageandfeatures
X Push a round pen into opening=(Y page 272) for approximately threeseconds.The zone currently selected appears incompass display;(Y page 272).
X To select the zone: push a round pen intoopening=(Y page 272) until the desiredzone is selected.If, after a few seconds, the display in com-pass display;(Y page 272) changesdirection, the zone has been selected.
Calibrating the compassX Make sure that there is sufficient space foryou to drive in a circle without impedingtraffic.
In order to calibrate the compass correctly,do the following:Rcalibrate the compass in the open and notin the vicinity of steel structures or high-voltage transmission lines.Rswitch off electrical consumers such as theclimate control, windshield wipers or rearwindow defroster.Rclose all doors and the trunk lid.X Switch on the ignition.X Push a round pen into opening=(Y page 272) for approximately six sec-onds, until symbol C is shown in compassdisplay;(Y page 272).
X Drive your vehicle in a full circle at approx-imately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph(10 km/h).When the calibration has successfully beencompleted, the current direction is shownin compass display;(Y page 272).
Floormats
G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.
X Slide the seat backwards.X To install: place the floormat in the foot-well.
X Press studs: onto retainers;.X To remove: pull the floormat off retain-ers;.
X Remove the floormat.
Features 273
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
274
Useful information ............................ 276Engine compartment ........................ 276ASSYST PLUS .................................... 280Care .................................................... 281
275
Maintenance
andcare
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).
Engine compartment
Hood
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving. Beforeevery trip, ensure that the hood is locked.
G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.
G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.
G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts
Opening the hood
G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.
G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.
! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.
276 Engine compartmentMaintenance
andcare
X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.
X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.
X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch han-dle; up and lift the hood.If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in(40 cm), the hood is opened and held openautomatically by the gas-filled strut.
Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a heightof approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and closeit with a little more force.
Engine oil
Notes on the oil levelDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumptionmay be higher than this when the vehicle isnew or if you frequently drive at high enginespeeds.Mercedes-AMG55SLK: before operation onrace tracks, check the oil level (Y page 277)and top up (Y page 278) if necessary. Racetrack operation is only permitted with a max-imum engine oil level.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick maybe in a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off forapproximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature, e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly, wait about 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.
Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick
G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.
Engine compartment 277
Maintenance
andcare
Z
ExampleX Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.
X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guidetube to the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= andMAX mark;, the oil level is correct.
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark=or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engineoil.
Adding engine oil
G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.
G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.
H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.
! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with a ser-vice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with theMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that havenot been specifically approved for theservice systemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters afterthe interval for replacement specified bythe service system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.
! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level isabove the "max" mark on the dipstick, toomuch oil has been added. This can lead todamage to the engine or the catalytic con-verter. Have excess oil siphoned off.
Example: engine oil capX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and removeit.
X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below theMINmark onthe oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) ofengine oil.
278 Engine compartmentMaintenance
andcare
X Replace cap: on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.
X Check the oil level again with the oil dip-stick (Y page 277).
Further information on engine oil(Y page 349).
Checking and adding other serviceproducts
Checking coolant level
G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.
G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is pressurized, par-ticularly when the engine is warm. Whenopening the cap, you could be scalded by hotcoolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before opening thecap. Wear eye and hand protection whenopening the cap. Open the cap slowly half aturn to allow pressure to escape.
Example
X Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when the vehi-cle is on a level surface and the engine hascooled down.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 140).
X Check the coolant temperature gauge inthe multifunction display.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).
X Turn the SmartKey to position0 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.
X Slowly turn cap; half a turn counter-clockwise to allow excess pressure toescape.
X Turn cap; further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level ofmarker bar=in the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank:.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) above marker bar= in the fuelfiller neck when warm, there is enoughcoolant in expansion tank:.
X If necessary, add coolant that has been tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Replace cap; and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.
For further information on coolant, see(Y page 350).
Windshield washer system
G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.
Engine compartment 279
Maintenance
andcare
Z
G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
ExampleX To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.
If the washer fluid level drops below the rec-ommended minimum of 1 liter, a messageappears in the multifunction display prompt-ing you to add washer fluid (Y page 239).Further information on windshield washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 351).
ASSYST PLUS
Service messagesThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate MaintenanceBooklet).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on the
engine oil level. Observe the notes on theengine oil level (Y page 277).
The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in .. DaysRService A DueRService A Exceeded by .. DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance untilthe next service due date is displayed.The letter A or B, possibly in connection with anumber or another letter, shows the type ofservice. A stands for a minor service and B fora major service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not take into account any periods oftime during which the battery is disconnec-ted.Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date displayedin the multifunction display before discon-necting the battery.
orX After reconnecting the battery, subtractthe battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.
Hiding a service messageX Press theaor%button on the steer-ing wheel.
280 ASSYST PLUSMaintenance
andcare
Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Serv. menu.
X Press the9 or: button to select theASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm bypressing thea button.The service due date appears in the multi-function display.
Information about Service
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-play has been inadvertently reset, this set-ting can be corrected at a qualified special-ist workshop.Have service work carried out as describedin the Maintenance Booklet. This may oth-erwise lead to increased wear and damageto the major assemblies or the vehicle.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will resetthe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayafter the service work has been carried out.You can also obtain further information onmaintenance work, for example.
Special service requirementsThe specifiedmaintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditionsor increased load on the vehicle, mainte-nance work must be carried out more fre-quently, for example:Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi-ate stopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travelshort distances
Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long peri-ods
Under these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires mustbe checked more often. Further informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialist work-shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter.
Driving abroadAnextensiveMercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain further information from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Care
Notes on care
H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, you
Care 281
Maintenance
andcare
Z
should drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents rec-ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork
Automatic car wash
G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations.To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func-tion in the following or other similar situa-tions:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash
! It is preferable to use car washes withadjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning thatcorresponds to the specification for theCabriolet program. In car washes that usehigh water pressures, there is a risk that asmall amount of water may leak into thevehicle.
! Lock the car if you wash it in an automaticcar wash. Otherwise, the vehicle might bedamaged.
! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.
If you have your vehicle cleaned in a high-pressure automatic car wash, smallamounts of water may enter the vehicle.
! Make sure that the automatic transmis-sion is in position N when washing yourvehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehi-cle could be damaged if the transmission isin another position.
! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the roof are com-pletely closedRthe climate control blower is switched offRthe windshield wiper switch is at position0
The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windshield and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on the wind-shield.
Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in all coun-tries concerned.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.
X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with agentle jet of water.
X Do not point the water jet directly towardsthe air inlet.
X Use plenty of water and rinse out thesponge frequently.
282 CareMaintenance
andcare
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on thepaintwork.
When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.
Power washers
G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.
! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.
! Do not use high-pressure cleaners if thetank recess is open while you clean it. Thiscan cause damage to the seals or othercomponents.
Cleaning the paintwork
! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused by inade-quate care cannot always be completelyrepaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.
X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.This is the case approximately every three tofive months, depending on the climate con-ditions and the care product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or ifthe paint has become dull, the paint cleanerrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used.Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MBTouch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage tothe paintwork quickly and provisionally.
Care 283
Maintenance
andcare
Z
Matte finish care
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.
! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork withunsuitable materialsRfrequent use of automatic car washesRwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerable sur-face damage (shiny, spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.
! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has aclear matte finish. This will help you to avoiddamage to the paintwork due to incorrecttreatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.
i The vehicle should preferably be washedby hand using a soft sponge, car shampooand plenty of water.
i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.
Cleaning the vehicle parts
Cleaning the wheels
G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.
! Donot use acidicwheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.
Cleaning the windows
G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of thewindows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.There is otherwise a risk of damaging thewindows.
! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certain circumstan-ces prevent water from draining away. Thiscan lead to corrosion damage and damageto electronic components.
284 CareMaintenance
andcare
X Clean the inside and outside of the win-dows with a damp cloth and a cleaningagent that is recommended and approvedby Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning wiper blades
G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield.
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.
Cleaning the exterior lighting
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths which are suitable for plastic lightlenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic light lenses.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the exteriorlighting using a wet sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz carshampoo or cleaning cloths.
Cleaning the mirror turn signals
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals in the exterior mirror housing usinga wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.
Cleaning the sensors
! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a dis-tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) betweenthe vehicle and the power washer nozzle.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipment manufac-turer.
X Clean sensors: of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the exhaust pipe
G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contact
Care 285
Maintenance
andcare
Z
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents, such as bathroomcleaner or wheel cleaner.
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome careproduct tested and approved byMercedes-Benz.
Impurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhaustpipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win-ter and after washing.
Interior care
Cleaning the display
! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-lowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household clean-ing agents
These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-ble damage to the display.
X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.
X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfiber cloth andTFT/LCD display cleaner.
X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-fiber cloth.
Cleaning the plastic trim
G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.
! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-ces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-ments
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol-ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk ofdamaging the surface.
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum and
286 CareMaintenance
andcare
can lose their shine if chrome polish isused. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If youare unsure as to whether the trim piecesare chrome-plated or not, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces witha damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the seat covers
General notes! Do not usemicrofiber cloths to clean gen-uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICAcovers. If used often, these can damage thecover.
i Note that regular care is essential toensure that the appearance and comfort ofthe covers is retained over time.
Genuine leather seat covers! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefullywith a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-ers down with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwisebecome rough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a quali-fied specialist workshop.
Leather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:
Rdifferences in the textureRmarks caused by growth and injuryRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.
Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean artificial leather covers with a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with amicrofiber clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and alwayswipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leavethe seat to dry afterwards. Cleaningresults depend on the type of dirt andhow long it has been there.Rclean DINAMICA covers with a dampcloth. Make sure that you wipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.
Cleaning the seat belts
G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
! Donot clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat beltsby heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †) or in direct sunlight.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-tion.
Care 287
Maintenance
andcare
Z
Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brushor dry shampoo.
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-ing agents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.
288 CareMaintenance
andcare
Useful information ............................ 290Where will I find...? ........................... 290Flat tire .............................................. 291Battery (vehicle) ................................ 296Jump-starting .................................... 299Towing and tow-starting .................. 301Fuses .................................................. 304
289
Breakdow
nassistance
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).
Where will I find...?
Vehicle tool kit
General notesThe vehicle tool kit can be found in the stow-age well under the trunk floor.
i Apart from certain country-specific varia-tions, the vehicles are not equipped with atire-change tool kit. Some tools for chang-ing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. Formore information on which tools arerequired to perform awheel change on yourvehicle, consult a qualified specialist work-shop.Tools required for changing a wheel mayinclude, for example:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrenchRRatchet wrenchRAlignment bolt
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit
Example: equipment and country-specific varia-tions possible: Tire sealant filler bottle: Tire sealant filler bottle; Fuse allocation chart= Tire inflation compressor? Towing eyeX Lift the trunk floor up.X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 292).
Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel
: Folding wheel chock; Fuse allocation chart= Jack? Sheet for faulty wheelA Alignment boltB Lug wrenchC Towing eyeD Valve extractorE Tire inflation compressor
290 Where will I find...?Breakdow
nassistance
X Lift the trunk floor up.X Remove the collapsible spare wheel(Y page 340).
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:Rtires with run-flat characteristics(MOExtended tires) (Y page 291)Vehicle preparation is not necessary onvehicles with MOExtended tiresRan emergency spare wheel (Y page 339)Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that you addi-tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit ifyou mount tires that do not feature run-flatproperties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit maybe obtained from a qualified specialist work-shop.Information on changing/mounting a wheel(Y page 330).X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 160).
X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.
X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open thedriver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 140).
X Make sure that the passengers are notendangered as they do so. Make sure thatno one is near the danger area while awheel is being changed. Anyone who is notdirectly assisting in the wheel changeshould, for example, stand behind the bar-rier.
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-fic conditions when doing so.
X Close the driver's door.
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)
General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires. The affectedtiremust not showany clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on thesidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index(Y page 324).MOExtended tires may only be used in con-junction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor.If a pressure loss warning messageappears in the multifunction display:Robserve the instructions in the displaymes-sages (Y page 234).Rcheck the tire for damage.Rif driving on, observe the following notes.The driving distance possible in run-flat modeis approximately 50 miles (80 km) when thevehicle is partially laden and approximately18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fullyladen.
Flat tire 291
Breakdow
nassistance
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-tance possible depends upon:Rvehicle speedRroad conditionRoutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme driving condi-tions or maneuvers, or it can be increasedthrough a moderate style of driving.The driving distance possible in run-flat modeis counted from themoment the tire pressureloss warning appears in the multifunction dis-play.You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).
i When replacing one or all tires, pleaseobserve the following specifications foryour vehicle's tires:RsizeRthe type andRthe "MOExtended" markIf a tire has gone flat and cannot bereplaced with a MOExtended tire, a stand-ard tire may be used as a temporary meas-ure. Make sure that you use the proper sizeand type (summer or winter tire).
i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit is available, for example, froma qualified specialist workshop.
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.
TIREFIT kit
Important safety notesTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem-peratures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).
G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire largerthan those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures oron a flat tire.
There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do notinhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant awayfrom children. There is a risk of injury.
292 Flat tireBreakdow
nassistance
If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skinimmediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact withyour eyes, immediately rinse them thor-oughly with clean water.RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.
! Do not operate the tire inflation compres-sor for longer than eight minutes at a timewithout a break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be oper-ated again once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturer’s safetyinstructions on the sticker on the tire inflationcompressor.
Using the TIREFIT kit
X Do not remove any foreign objects whichhave penetrated the tire, e.g. screws ornails.
X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom-panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire infla-tion compressor from the stowage wellunderneath the trunk floor (Y page 290).
X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker to theinstrument cluster within the driver's fieldof vision.
X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.
: Tire sealant filler bottle; Tire inflation compressor= Connector? On/off switchA CapB Filler hoseX Remove filler hoseB and plug= from thebottom section of the tire inflation com-pressor housing.
X Slide the yellow filler hose connector intothe mounting on yellow capA of tire seal-ant bottle: until the plug engages.
X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellowcapA of tire sealant bottle: into themounting of tire inflation compressor;.The cap must engage in both hooks.
Flat tire 293
Breakdow
nassistance
Z
X Remove the cap from valveC on the faultytire.
X Screw filler hoseD onto valve.X Insert plug= into the socket of the ciga-rette lighter (Y page 258) or into a 12 Vsocket in your vehicle (Y page 259).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
X Press on and off switch? on the tire infla-tion compressor to ON.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated.i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.The pressure may briefly rise to approx-imately 500 kPa (5.0 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflation com-pressor during this phase.
X Let the tire inflation compressor run for amaximum of ten minutes. The tire shouldthen have attained a pressure of at least200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).
If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)is achieved after a maximum of ten minutes,see (Y page 294).If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)is not achieved after a maximum of tenminutes, see (Y page 294).
i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. Itcan then be removed like a layer of film.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,have them cleaned with perchloroethyleneat a dry cleaner as soon as possible.
Tire pressure not reachedIf a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)has been achieved after ten minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverseapproximately 30 ft (10 m).
X Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of ten minutes, the tirepressuremust be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).
G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
Tire pressure reached
G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.
The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tiresealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper partof the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to theinstrument cluster in the driver's field ofvision.
! Residue from the tire sealant may comeout of the filler hose after use. This couldcause stains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.
294 Flat tireBreakdow
nassistance
If tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)has been achieved after a maximum period often minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.
X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.
X Pull away immediately.X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure withthe tire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
i In cases such as the one mentionedabove, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Can-ada).
X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver'sside B-pillar or the tire pressure table in thefuel filler flap for values.
X To increase the tire pressure: switch onthe tire inflation compressor.
X To reduce the tire pressure: depresspressure release button: next to pres-sure gauge;.
X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrewthe filler hose from the valve of the sealedtire.
X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve ofthe sealed tire.
X To remove the tire sealant bottle from thetire inflation compressor, press togetherthe locking tabs on the yellow cap.
X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tireinflation compressor.The filler hose remains attached to the tiresealant bottle.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialistworkshop and have the tire changed there.
X Have the tire sealant bottle and the fillerhose replaced as soon as possible at aqualified specialist workshop.
X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialist work-shop.
Flat tire 295
Breakdow
nassistance
Z
Battery (vehicle)
Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge arerequired when working on the battery, e.g.removal and installation. You should there-fore have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or theESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.You could lose control of the vehicle, forexample:Rwhen brakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuversand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions
There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
For further information about ABS and ESP®,see (Y page 61) and (Y page 65).
G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.
The highly flammable gasmixture formswhencharging the battery as well as when jump-starting.
Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, forexample:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across thecarpet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth
G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.
G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.
296 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow
nassistance
H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.
! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in the Main-tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop for more information.
! You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. In the exceptional case that it isnecessary for you to disconnect the batteryyourself, make sure that:Ryou switch off the engine and remove thekey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,ensure that the ignition is switched off.Check that all the indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster are off. Otherwise,electronic components, such as thealternator, may be damaged.Ryou first remove the negative terminalclamp and then the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys-tem may be damaged.Rin vehicles with automatic transmission,the transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. The vehi-cle is secured against rolling away. Youcan then no longer move the vehicle.
The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be installed securelyduring operation.
In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-mum possible service life, it must always besufficiently charged.Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con-tact with skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron and face-guard.Rinse any acid spills immediatelywith clear water. Contact a physi-cian if necessary.Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
The vehicle battery, like other batteries, candischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In this case, have the battery discon-nected at a qualified specialist workshop. Youcan also charge the battery with a chargerrecommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact aqualified specialist workshop for further infor-mation.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainlyfor short trips or if you leave it standing idlefor a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop if you wish to leave yourvehicle parked for a long period of time.
Battery (vehicle) 297
Breakdow
nassistance
Z
i Remove the SmartKey if you park thevehicle and do not require any electricalconsumers. The vehicle will then use verylittle energy, thus conserving batterypower.
i If the power supply has been interrupted,e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you willhave to:Rset the clock; see the separate operatinginstructions.On vehicles with COMAND and a naviga-tion system, the clock is set automati-cally.Rreset the function for folding the exteriormirrors in/out automatically, by foldingthe mirrors out once (Y page 104).
Charging the battery
G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.
G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.
! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment.If the indicator/warning lamps do not light upat low temperatures, it is very likely that thedischarged battery has frozen. In this case,you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting char-acteristics can be impaired, particularly atlow temperatures. Have the thawed-out bat-tery checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.Read the battery charger's operating instruc-tions before charging the battery.X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the sameorder as when connecting the donor bat-tery in the jump-starting procedure(Y page 299).
298 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow
nassistance
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of apositive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment.
G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty ofclean water and seek medical attention.
G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that thedischarged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-startthe vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out batterymay be shorter. The starting characteristicscan be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at aqualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting 299
Breakdow
nassistance
Z
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpercables. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connectedfor a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.RBare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while thejumper cables are connected to the battery.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine isrunning, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.
Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.X Slide cover: of positive terminal; in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal; on your vehicle to positive terminal= of donor batteryBusing the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal; on your own vehicle first.
300 Jump-startingBreakdow
nassistance
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal? of donor batteryB to ground pointA of your vehicle usingthe jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicleB first.
X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground pointA and negative terminal?, then frompositive clamp; and positive terminal=. Begin each time at the contacts on your ownvehicle first.
X Close cover: of positive terminal; after removing the jumper cables.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.
Towing and tow-starting
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.
There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.
Vehicles with 7G-TRONIC:
! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use theSmartKey instead of the Start/Stop but-ton. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock and shift the automatic trans-mission toN. Then, turn the SmartKey backto 0 and leave it in the ignition lock.
Vehicles with 9G-TRONIC:
! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,use the key instead of the Start/Stop but-ton. Otherwise, the automatic transmissionmay shift to position P when the driver's or
front-passenger door are opened, whichcould lead to damage to the transmission.
All vehicles:
! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbe damaged.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations.To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func-tion in the following or other similar situa-tions:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash
! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt,recover the vehicle with a crane.
! Drive slowly and smoothly when towing.Excessive tractive power could otherwisedamage the vehicles.
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.
! Make sure that the electric parking brakeis released. If the electric parking brake isfaulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Towing and tow-starting 301
Breakdow
nassistance
Z
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30 miles (50km). The towing speed of30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.
! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, itsweight must not exceed the maximum per-missible gross vehicle weight of your vehi-cle.
i Information on your vehicle's gross vehi-cle weight rating can be found on the vehi-cle identification plate; see the printedOperator's Manual.
i Information on your vehicle's gross vehi-cle weight rating can be found on the vehi-cle identification plate (Y page 345).
It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed away.Vehicles with automatic transmission:when towing a vehicle, the automatic trans-mission must be in position N.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lockRcannot shift the transmission to position Non vehicles with automatic transmission.
Vehicles with 7G-TRONIC: release theselector lever lock manually to move it out ofposition P (Y page 157).Before the vehicle is towed, deactivate theautomatic locking feature (Y page 206). Youcould otherwise be locked out when pushingor towing the vehicle.
Installing/removing the towing eye
Installing the towing eye
G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipemay be very hot. There isa risk of burns when removing the rear cover.
Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particularcare when removing the rear cover.
Themountings for the removable towing eyesare located in the bumpers. They are at thefront and at the rear, behind the covers.X Press the mark on cover: inwards in thedirection of the arrow.
X Take cover: off the opening.X Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit (Y page 290).
X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far asit will go and tighten it.
Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Attach cover: to the bumper and pressuntil it engages.
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit(Y page 290).
Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe ground
G WARNINGYou can no longer steer the vehicle if thesteering wheel lock has been engaged. Thereis a risk of an accident.
302 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow
nassistance
Always switch off the ignitionwhen towing thevehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.
Vehicles with 9G-TRONIC: the automatictransmission automatically shifts to positionP when you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the keyfrom the ignition lock.Vehicles with automatic transmission: inorder to ensure that the automatic transmis-sion stays in positionNwhen towing away thevehicle, you must observe the followingpoints:X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 111).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use theSmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button(Y page 140).
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the transmission to position N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in theignition lock.
In order to signal a change of direction whentowing the vehicle with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combinationswitch as usual. In this case, only the indica-tor lamps for the direction of travel flash.When you reset the combination switch, thehazard warning flashers start flashing again.It is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 301).
Towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised! The ignition must be switched off if youare towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised. Intervention by ESP® could other-wise damage the brake system.
! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be towedwith the rear axle raised.The vehicle/trailer combination may oth-erwise swerve or even roll over.
Transporting the vehicle! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise,the vehicle could be damaged.
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transportingpurposes.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.
X Shift the transmission to position N.As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the electric parking brake.
X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 0 and remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock.
X Secure the vehicle.
Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be tow-started. You could other-wise damage the automatic transmission.
You can find information on "Jump-starting" at(Y page 299).Before tow-starting:Rthe battery must be connectedRthe engine must be coldRthe exhaust systemmust have cooled downWhen tow-starting, it is important that youobserve the safety instructions (Y page 301).
Towing and tow-starting 303
Breakdow
nassistance
Z
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 111).
X Install the towing eye (Y page 302).X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towingrope.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.
X Depress the clutch pedal fully, engage sec-ond gear and keep the clutch pedaldepressed.
X Release the brake pedal.X Tow-start the vehicle.X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do notdepress the accelerator pedal while doingso.
X As soon as the engine starts, depress theclutch pedal immediately and shift to neu-tral.
X Stop at a suitable place, in accordance withthe traffic conditions.
X Depress the parking brake.X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope.X Remove the towing eye (Y page 302).X Switch off the hazard warning lamps.
Fuses
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.
! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Otherwise, components or sys-tems could be damaged.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize bythe color and value. The fuse ratings are listedin the fuse allocation chart.If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-cialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
Before changing a fuseX Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 160).
X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock and remove it (Y page 139).
orX On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make surethe ignition is switched off (Y page 140).
All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box in the engine compartment on theleft-hand side of the vehicle, when viewedin the direction of travelRFuse box in the trunkThe fuse allocation chart is located in thevehicle tool kit in the stowage compartmentunder the trunk floor (Y page 290).
Fuse box in the engine compartmenti Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 304).
G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
304 FusesBreakdow
nassistance
Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.
X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.
X Open the hood.X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisturefrom the fuse box.
X To open: open clamp:.X Remove fuse box cover; forwards.
X To close: check whether the seal is seatedcorrectly in cover;.
X Insert cover; at the rear of the fuse boxinto the retainer.
X Fold down cover; and close clamps:.X Close the hood.
Fuse box in the trunki Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 304).
! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.
The fuse box is located in the trunk behind thepartition covering.X Open the trunk lid.X To open: release cover: on the right andleft-hand sides with a flat object.
X Open cover: downwards in the directionof the arrow.
Fuses 305
Breakdow
nassistance
Z
306
Useful information ............................ 308Important safety notes ..................... 308Operation ........................................... 308Winter operation ............................... 310Tire pressure ..................................... 311Loading the vehicle .......................... 319All about wheels and tires ............... 322Changing a wheel .............................. 330Wheel and tire combinations ........... 335Emergency spare wheel ................... 339
307
Wheelsandtires
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel
G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and warn-ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics).
Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not beingused correctly can impair operating safety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on the sizes and types of wheelsand tires for your vehicle can be found under"Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 335).Information on tire pressure can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard on the B-pillar (Y page 319)Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflap (Y page 159)Rin the "Tire pressure" section
Operation
Information on drivingCheck the tire pressure when the vehicle isheavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.While driving, pay attention to vibrations,noises and unusual handling characteristics,e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate thatthe wheels or tires are damaged. If you sus-pect that a tire is defective, reduce yourspeed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soonas possible to check the wheels and tires fordamage. Hidden tire damage could also becausing the unusual handling characteristics.If you find no signs of damage, have the tiresand wheels checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.When parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tires do not get deformed by the curb orother obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over
308 OperationWheelsandtires
curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, tryto do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth-erwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls,may be damaged.
Regular checking of wheels and tires
G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.
Regularly check the wheels and tires of yourvehicle for damage at least once a month, aswell as after driving off-road or on roughroads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss oftire pressure. Pay particular attention to dam-age such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole widthof the tire (Y page 309). If necessary, turn thefront wheels to full lock in order to inspect theinner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do notmount anything onto the valve other than thestandard valve cap or other valve capsapproved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.Do not use any other valve caps or systems,e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tiresparticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tirepressure as necessary (Y page 311).Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 339).
The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered
Notes on tire tread
G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.
Marking: shows where the bar indicator fortread wear (arrow) is integrated into the tiretread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned on the tiretread. They are visible once a tread depth of
Operation 309
Wheelsandtires
Z
approximatelyá in (1.6 mm) has beenreached. If this is the case, the tire is so wornthat it must be replaced.
Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the sametype and make.Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-ferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 291).ROnly mount tires of the correct size ontothe wheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds forthe first 60miles (100 km). They only reachtheir full performance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the lat-est, regardless of wear.
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)With MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used in con-junction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor and on wheels specifically tested byMercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tires witha flat tire (Y page 291).
i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali-fied specialist workshop.
Winter operation
General notesHave your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali-fied specialist workshop at the onset of win-ter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 330).
Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on your vehi-cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at verycold temperatures could cause cracks toform, thereby damaging the tires perma-nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot acceptresponsibility for this type of damage.
G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.
M+S tires
G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
At temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), use win-ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tireare identified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-
310 Winter operationWheelsandtires
vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-ditions.Only these tires will allow driving safety sys-tems such as ABS and ESP® to function opti-mally in winter. These tires have been devel-oped specifically for driving in snow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handling charac-teristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted the M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 315).X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres-sure loss warning system (Y page 315).
X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 316).
Information about driving with an emergencyspare wheel (Y page 339).
Snow chains
G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains thathave been specially approved for your vehicleby Mercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality. For more information,please contact a qualified specialist work-shop.
If you intend to mount snow chains, pleasebear the following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissiblewheel-tire combinations (Y page 335).ROnly use snow chains when driving onroads completely covered by snow.Remove the snow chains as soon as possi-ble when you come to a road that is notsnow-covered.RLocal regulations may restrict the use ofsnow chains. Observe the appropriate reg-ulations if you wish to install snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pull-ing away with snow chains installed(Y page 66). You can thereby allow thewheelsto spin in a controlled manner, achieving anincreased driving force (cutting action).Information about driving with an emergencyspare wheel (Y page 339).
Tire pressure
Tire pressure specifications
Important safety notes
G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Tire pressure 311
Wheelsandtires
Z
Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
i The specifications on the sample Tire andLoading Information placard and tire pres-sure tables are examples. Tire pressurespecifications are vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data shown here. The tirepressure specifications that are valid foryour vehicle can be found on the Tire andLoading Information placard and tire pres-sure table on the vehicle.
General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Operation with an emergency sparewheel: information on operation with anemergency spare wheel can be found in thegeneral notes in the "Emergency sparewheel"section (Y page 339).Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire and Loading Information placard
: Recommended tire pressures
The Tire and Loading Information placard ison the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 319).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires. The recommended tire pressuresare valid for the maximum permissible loadand up to the maximum permissible vehiclespeed.
Tire pressure tableThe tire pressure table is on the inside of thefuel filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for alltires approved for this vehicle by the factory,see illustration (example).
The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended pressures for cold tires for variousoperating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions.If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only validfor that tire size; see illustration (example).
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fullyladen" are defined in the table for different
312 Tire pressureWheelsandtires
numbers of occupants and amounts of lug-gage. The actual number of seats may differ.
Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire sizeand can be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 324).If the tire pressures have been set to thelower values for lighter loads and/or lowerroad speeds, the pressures should be reset tothe higher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speeds
i The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or higher road speeds, shown in thetire pressure table, may have a negativeeffect on driving comfort.
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan lead to an excessive build up of heat anda sudden loss of pressure.Formore information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
Important notes on tire pressure
G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure. On vehicles equipped withthe electronic tire pressure monitor, the tirepressure can be checked in the on-boardcomputer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-ent on the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)
The tire temperature changes depending onthe outside temperature, the vehicle speedand the tire load. If the tire temperaturechanges by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressurechanges by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when check-ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correctthe tire pressure if it is too low for the currentoperating conditions. If you check the tirepressure when the tires are warm, the result-
Tire pressure 313
Wheelsandtires
Z
ing value will be higher than if the tires werecold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tirepressure to the value specified for cold tires.The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of thefuel filler flapRprinted in yellow on the rim of the emer-gency/collapsible spare wheel (dependingon vehicle equipment)
Underinflated or overinflated tires
Underinflation
G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.
Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRhave an adverse effect on handling charac-teristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Overinflation
G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.
Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRhave an adverse effect on handling charac-teristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage
Maximum tire pressures
: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the rec-ommended tire pressure for your vehiclewhen adjusting the tire pressure(Y page 311).
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.
Checking the tire pressures
Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 311).
314 Tire pressureWheelsandtires
Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard on the B-pillarRon the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflapRin the "Tire pressure" section
Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pres-sure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is tobe checked.
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.
X Read the tire pressure and compare it tothe recommended value on the Tire andLoading Information placard or the tirepressure table (Y page 311).
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase thetire pressure to the recommended value.
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air.To do so, press down the metal pin in thevalve, using the tip of a pen for example.Then check the tire pressure again usingthe tire pressure checker.
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Tire pressure loss warning system(Canada only)
General notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tire pres-sure loss warning system monitors the settire pressure using the rotational speed of thewheels. This enables the system to detectsignificant pressure loss in a tire. If the speedof rotation of a wheel changes as a result of aloss of pressure, a corresponding warningmessage will appear in the multifunction dis-play.
You can recognize the tire pressure losswarn-ing by the Run Flat Indicator ActivePress 'OK' to Restart message whichappears in the Serv. menu of the multifunc-tion display. Information on the message dis-play can be found in the "Restarting the tirepressure loss warning system" section(Y page 315).
Important safety notesThe tire pressure warning system does notwarn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.Observe the notes on the recommended tirepressure (Y page 311).The tire pressure loss warning does notreplace the need to regularly check the tirepressure. An even loss of pressure on severaltires at the same time cannot be detected bythe tire pressure loss warning system.The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The function of the tire pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle'stires.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor-nering at high speeds or driving with highrates of acceleration).Ryou drive with a heavy load.
Restarting the tire pressure loss warn-ing systemRestart the tire pressure loss warning systemif you have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmounted new wheels or tires
Tire pressure 315
Wheelsandtires
Z
X Before restarting, make sure that the tirepressures are set properly on all four tiresfor the respective operating conditions.The recommended tire pressure can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tirepressure table is attached to the fuel fillerflap. The tire pressure loss warning systemcan only give reliable warnings if you haveset the correct tire pressure. If an incorrecttire pressure is set, these incorrect valueswill be monitored.
X Also observe the notes in the section on tirepressures (Y page 311).
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 139).
X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Serv. menu.
X Press the9 or: button to selectTire Pressure.
X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator ActivePress 'OK' to Restart messageappears in the multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.
X Press the9 or: button to selectYes.
X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator Restartedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.After a teach-in period, the tire pressureloss warning system will monitor the settire pressures of all four tires.
If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.orX If the Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears, use the9 or: button toselect Cancel.
X Press thea button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.
Tire pressure monitor
General notesIf a tire pressuremonitor is installed, the vehi-cle's wheels have sensors that monitor thetire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres-sure monitor warns you if the pressure dropsin one or more of the tires. The tire pressuremonitor only functions if the correspondingsensors are installed in all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe multifunction display. After a fewminutesof driving, the current tire pressure of eachtire is shown in the Serv. menu of the multi-function display.
Example: current tire pressure display
For information on the message display, referto the "Checking the tire pressure electroni-cally" section (Y page 318).
Important safety notes
G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the pressure rec-ommended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressurelabel on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than thesize indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard or the tire pressure label, you
316 Tire pressureWheelsandtires
should determine the proper tire pressure forthose tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Underinflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle's handling and stop-ping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-er's responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with thelow tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the warning lamp willflash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists.When themalfunction indicator is illuminated,the systemmay not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-tions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of incompatiblereplacement or alternate tires or wheels onthe vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-tioning properly. Always check the TPMSmal-function telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure thatthe replacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to function prop-erly.
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 311). Note that the correct tire pres-sure for the current operating situation mustfirst be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor.If there is a substantial loss of pressure, thewarning threshold for the warning message isaligned to the reference values taught-in.Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjust-ing the pressure of the cold tires(Y page 318). The current pressures aresaved as new reference values. As a result, awarning message will appear if the tire pres-sure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn youof an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 311).The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn-ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat-ing pressure loss or a malfunction. Whetherthe warning lamp flashes or lights up indi-cates whether a tire pressure is too low or thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, thetire pressure on one or more tires is signif-icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor isnot malfunctioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
In addition to the warning lamp, a messageappears in the multifunction display. Observethe information on display messages(Y page 234).It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunc-tion of the tire pressure monitor to be indica-ted. Amalfunction will be indicated by the tirepressure warning lamp flashing for approx-
Tire pressure 317
Wheelsandtires
Z
imately one minute and then remaining lit.When the malfunction has been rectified, thetire pressure warning lamp goes out after afew minutes of driving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gage.The tire pressures shown by the on-boardcomputer refer to those measured at sealevel. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val-ues indicated by a pressure gage are higherthan those shown by the on-board computer.In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressuremonitor canbe affected by interference from radio trans-mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones,two-way radios) that may be being operatedin or near the vehicle.
Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 139).
X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Serv. menu.
X Press the9 or: button to selectTire Pressure.
X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the multifunction display.
If the vehicle has been parked for over20 minutes, the Tire pressure will bedisplayed after driving a fewminutes message appears.After a teach-in process, the tire pressuremonitor automatically detects new wheels ornew sensors. As long as a clear allocation ofthe tire pressure value to the individualwheels is not possible, the Tire PressureMonitor Active display message is showninstead of the tire pressure display. The tirepressures are already being monitored.
i If an emergency spare wheel is mounted,the system may continue to show the tirepressure of the wheel that has been
removed for a few minutes. If this occurs,note that the value displayed for the posi-tion where the spare wheel is mounted isnot the same as the current tire pressure ofthe emergency spare wheel.
Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressuremonitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning messageis shown in the multifunction display and theyellow tire pressure monitor warning lampcomes on.RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressuremessage appears in the multifunction dis-play, the tire pressure in at least one tire istoo low and must be corrected at the nextopportunity.RIf the Check Tiresmessage appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure inone or more tires has dropped significantlyand the tires must be checked.RIf the Warning Tire Malfunctionappears in the multifunction display, thetire pressure in one or more tires has drop-ped suddenly and the tires must bechecked.
Observe the instructions and safety notes inthe display messages in the "Tires" section(Y page 234).
i If the wheel positions on the vehicle arerotated, the tire pressures may be dis-played for the wrong positions for a shorttime. This is rectified after a few minutes ofdriving, and the tire pressures are displayedfor the correct positions.
Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressuremonitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted andthe warning lamps go out. The monitor usesthe currently set tire pressures as the refer-ence values formonitoring. Inmost cases, thetire pressure monitor will automaticallydetect the new reference values after you
318 Tire pressureWheelsandtires
have changed the tire pressure. However, youcan also define reference values manually asdescribed here. The tire pressure monitorthen monitors the new tire pressure values.X Set the tire pressure to the value recom-mended for the corresponding driving sit-uation on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the driver's sideB-pillar (Y page 311).Additional tire pressure values for differentloads can also be found on the tire pressuretable on the inside of the fuel filler flap(Y page 311).
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correcton all four wheels.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.
X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Serv. menu.
X Press the9 or: button to selectTire Pressure.
X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows the cur-rent tire pressure for the individual tires orthe Tire pressure will be displayedafter driving a few minutes mes-sage.
X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as NewReference Values message appears inthe multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor Restartedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressuresare within the specified range. The new tirepressures are then accepted as referencevalues and monitored.
If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.
Radio type approval for the tire pres-sure monitor
Country Radio type approval number
USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433AFCC ID: MRXGG4FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4
Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433AIC: 2546A-GG4IC: 2546A-MC34MA4
Loading the vehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows themaximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximum permis-sible vehicle load. It also contains detailsof the tire sizes and corresponding pres-sures for tires mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made up
Loading the vehicle 319
Wheelsandtires
Z
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu-pants, the fuel and the cargo. You canalso find information about themaximumgross axle weight rating on the front andrear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or the maxi-mum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.
: B-pillar, driver's side
Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating
X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight: is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combined weightof occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,load and luggage must not exceed the speci-fied value.
i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The maximum permis-sible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in theillustration. You can find the validmaximumpermissible gross vehicle weight rating foryour vehicle on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard.
Number of seats
Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The number of seats isvehicle-specific and can differ from thedetails shown. The number of seats in yourvehicle can be found on the Tire and Load-ing Information placard.
Determining the correct load limit
Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".
320 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-bined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." onyour vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationplacard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXX kilo-grams or XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs and there will be five150-lb passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).
X Step 5:Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage load capa-city calculated in step 4.
Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on howto calculate total and cargo load capacitieswith varying seating configurations and num-ber and size of occupants. The followingexamples use a load limit of 1500 lbs(680 kg). This is for illustration purposesonly.Make sure you are using the actual loadlimit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle'sTire and Loading Information placard(Y page 319).The greater the combined weight of the occu-pants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2
Combinedmaximumweight ofoccupantsand cargo(data from theTire and Load-ing Informa-tion placard)
1500 lbs(680 kg)
1500 lbs(680 kg)
Step 2
Example 1 Example 2
Number ofpeople in thevehicle (driverand occu-pants)
1 2
Weight of theoccupants
Occu-pant 1:175 lbs(80 kg)
Occu-pant 1:175 lbs(80 kg)Occu-pant 2:195 lbs(88 kg)
Gross weightof all occu-pants
175 lbs(80 kg)
370 lbs(168 kg)
Loading the vehicle 321
Wheelsandtires
Z
Step 3
Example 1 Example 2
Permissibleload (maxi-mum grossvehicleweightrating fromthe Tire andLoading Infor-mation plac-ard minus thegross weightof all occu-pants)
1500 lbs(680 kg) Ò175 lbs(80 kg) =1325 lbs(600 kg)
1500 lbs(680 kg) Ò370 lbs(168 kg) =1130 lbs(512 kg)
Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargocarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 319).Permissible gross vehicle weight: thegross weight of the vehicle, all passengersand the loadmust not exceed the permissiblegross vehicle weight.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): themaximum permissible weight that can be car-ried by one axle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (gross vehi-cle weight and maximum gross axle weightrating), have your loaded vehicle (includingdriver, occupants and the load) weighed on asuitable vehicle weighbridge.
All about wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards
Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards areU.S. government specifications. Their pur-pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia-ble information on tire performance data. Tiremanufacturers have to grade tires using threeperformance factors: treadwear grade:,traction grade; and temperature grade=.These regulations do not apply to Canada.Nevertheless, all tires sold in North Americaare provided with the corresponding qualitygrading markings on the sidewall of the tire.Where applicable, the tire grading informa-tion can be found on the tire sidewall betweenthe tread shoulder and maximum tire width.Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.
322 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires
TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. government course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government course as atire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, how-ever, and may depart significantly from thenorm, due to variations in driving habits, ser-vice practices and differences in road char-acteristics and climate conditions.
Traction
G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on a wet surface asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfa-ces.You should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimumtread depth ofã in (4 mm) on all four wintertires. Observe the legally required minimumtire tread depth (Y page 309).Winter tires canreduce the braking distance on snow-coveredsurfaces in comparison with summer tires.The braking distance is still much further than
on surfaces that are not icy or covered withsnow. Take appropriate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+Stires) (Y page 310).
Temperature
G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C. These represent the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and its ability to dis-sipate heat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tiresmustmeet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higherlevels of performance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required by law.
All about wheels and tires 323
Wheelsandtires
Z
Tire labeling
Overview
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 328)
; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 327)
= Maximum tire load (Y page 326)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 314)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 327)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capa-
city and speed index (Y page 324)D Load index (Y page 326)E Tire nameThe markings described above are on the tirein addition to the tire name (sales designa-tion) and the manufacturer's name.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.
Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating
G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.
: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed ratingGeneral: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wallmay not contain any letters or may containone letter that precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: theseare light truck tires according to U.S. manu-facturing standards.If "T" precedes the size description: compactemergency wheels with high tire pressurethat are only designed for temporary use in anemergency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Height-width ratio: aspect ratio; is thesize ratio between the tire height and tirewidth and is shown in percent. The aspect
324 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires
ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width bythe tire height.Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" representsdiagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on the man-ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diam-eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of therim flange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexAis a numerical code that specifies the maxi-mum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 319).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires canbear. For further information on themaximumtire load in kilograms and lbs, see(Y page 326).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 326).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.
Regardless of the speed rating, alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully andadapt your driving style to the traffic condi-tions.
Sum-mertires
Index Speed rating
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149mph (240 km/h)may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).The service specification is made up ofload-bearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no service specifica-tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order tofind out the maximum speed.If a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this exam-ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. Theletter "Y" represents the speed rating. Themaximum speed of the tire is limited to186 mph (300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires with maxi-mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)must include "ZR", and the service specifi-cationmust be given in parentheses. Exam-ple: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating
All about wheels and tires 325
Wheelsandtires
Z
"(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed ofthe tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Askthe tire manufacturer about the maximumspeed.
All-weathertiresand win-ter tires
Index Speed rating
Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
i Not all tires with theM+Smarking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to the M+S marking, winter tiresalso have thei snowflake symbol onthe tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfillthe requirements of the Rubber Manufac-turers Association (RMA) and the RubberAssociation of Canada (RAC) regarding thetire traction on snow. They have been espe-cially developed for driving on snow.
An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehicle from exceeding the following speeds:RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): 130 mph (210 km/h)RMercedes-AMG vehicles: 155 mph(250 km/h)RMercedes-AMG vehicles with PerformancePackage: 174 mph (280 km/h)
The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac-tory may be higher than the maximum speedthat the electronic speed limiter permits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "tires" section (Y page 335).
Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.
Load index
In addition to the load bearing index, load rat-ing:may be imprinted after the letters thatidentify speed rating on the sidewall of the tire(Y page 324).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforcedtireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range thatdepends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.
Maximum load rating
1 Or M+Si for winter tires.
326 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires
Maximum load rating: is the maximum per-missible weight for which the tire is approved.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 319).
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every tiremanufacturer or retreader must imprint a TINin or on the sidewall of every tire produced.
The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN makes it easier for tire manufacturers orretreaders to notify customers of recalls orother safety-related matters. It makes it pos-sible for the purchaser to easily identify theaffected tires.The TIN consists of the manufacturer identi-fication code;, tire size=, tire typecode? and manufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol: indicates that the tire complieswith the requirements of the U.S. Departmentof Transportation.Manufacturer identification code: manu-facturer identification code; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.
For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 308).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can be usedby the manufacturer as a code to describespecific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked with"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in2008.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.
Tire characteristics
This information describes the type of tirecord and the number of layers in sidewall:and under tire tread;.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.
Definition of terms for tires and loading
Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of plies or the numberof layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tiretread and sidewall. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.
All about wheels and tires 327
Wheelsandtires
Z
BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals(kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe United States Department of Transporta-tion.
Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants which the vehicle isdesigned for, multiplied by 68 kilograms(150 lb).
Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality oftireswith regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers using U.S.government testing procedures. The ratingsare molded into the sidewall of the tire.
Recommended tire pressureThe recommended tire pressure applies tothe tires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended pressures for cold tires for variousoperating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions.
Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThis is the combined weight of all standardand optional equipment available for the vehi-cle, regardless of whether it is actually instal-led on the vehicle or not.
RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum permissible axleweight. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.
Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identifica-tion. It specifies the speed range forwhich thetire is approved.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug-gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica-ble. The gross vehicleweightmust not exceedthe gross vehicle weight rating GVWR asspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B pillar on the driver's side.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories, occu-pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-weight, if applicable). The gross vehicleweight rating is specified on the vehicle iden-tification plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.
Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment
Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressureis bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to1 bar.
328 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires
Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindexmay also be imprinted on the sidewall ofthe tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa-city more precisely.
Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standard equip-ment including themaximum capacity of fuel,oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-tioning system and optional equipment ifthese are installed in the vehicle, but does notinclude passengers or luggage.
Maximum load ratingThe maximum tire load is the maximum per-missible weight in kilograms or lbs for which atire is approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.
Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing themaximum axle load of one axleby two.
PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.
Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying anoutward force to each square inch of the tire'ssurface. The tire pressure is specified inpounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should onlybe corrected when the tires are cold.
Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has been driven for less than1 mile (1.6 km).
TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.
BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.
SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.
Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).These optional extras, such as high-perform-ance brakes, level control, a roof rack or ahigh-performance battery, are not included inthe curb weight and the weight of the acces-sories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.
Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains themaximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.
All about wheels and tires 329
Wheelsandtires
Z
TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.
Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis-tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread islevel with the bars, the wear limit ofá in(1.6 mm) has been reached.
Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.
Total load limitRated cargo and luggage load plus68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the num-ber of seats in the vehicle.
Changing a wheel
Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 291) contains information and noteson how to deal with a flat tire. Information ondriving with MOExtended tires in the event ofa flat tire can be found under "MOExtendedtires (tires with run-flat characteristics"(Y page 291).
Rotating the wheels
G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are loca-ted in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage the elec-tronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes when changing a wheel(Y page 331).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.On vehicles that have the same size front andrear wheels, you can rotate the wheelsaccording to the intervals in the tire manu-facturer's warranty book in your vehicle docu-ments. If no warranty book is available, thetires should be rotated every 3,000 to6,000miles (5,000 to 10,000 km). Dependingon tire wear, this may be required earlier. Donot change the direction of wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if nec-essary, restart the tire pressure loss warningsystem or the tire pressure monitor.
Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. These advantages can onlybe gained if the tires are installed correspond-ing to the direction of rotation.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheelsStorewheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
330 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires
Mounting a wheel
Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.
X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open thedriver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 140).
X If included in the vehicle equipment,remove the tire-change tool kit from thevehicle.
X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
i Due to differences in vehicle equipment,not all vehicles are equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For information on whichtools are required to perform a wheelchange on your vehicle, consult an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.Necessary tire-changing tools can include,for example:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrench
Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away
If your vehicle is equippedwith awheel chock,it can be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 290).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsecuring measure to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away, for example when changing awheel.X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully intothe openings in base plate=.
Securing the vehicle on level groundX On level ground: place chocks or othersuitable items under the front and rear ofthe wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.
Changing a wheel 331
Wheelsandtires
Z
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradientsX On light downhill gradients: placechocks or other suitable items in front ofthe wheels of the front and rear axle.
Raising the vehicle
G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.
! The jack is designed exclusively for jack-ing up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.
Observe the following when raising the vehi-cle:RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-cle raised.RThe jack is designed only to raise and holdthe vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It is not suited for per-forming maintenance work under the vehi-cle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill anddownhill slopes.
RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it fromrolling away by applying the parking brakeand inserting wheel chocks. Never disen-gage the parking brake while the vehicle israised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, flat, load-bearing underlay must beused. On a slippery surface, a non-slipunderlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.RDo not use wooden blocks or similarobjects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.RMake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).RNever place your hands and feet under theraised vehicle.RDo not lie under the vehicle.RDo not start the engine when the vehicle israised.RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lidwhen the vehicle is raised.RMake sure that no persons are present inthe vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
X Using lug wrench:, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-pletely.
332 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires
The jacking points are located just behind thefront wheel housings and just in front of therear wheel housings (arrows).Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicleswith AMG equipment: to protect the vehiclebody, the vehicle has covers installed next tothe jacking points on the outer sills.
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicleswith AMG equipment: fold cover;upwards.
= Jacking point? JackA Ratchet wrench
X Position jack? at jacking point=.
X Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.
X Turn crankA clockwise until jack? sitscompletely on jacking point=. The base ofthe jack must lie evenly on the ground.
X Turn crankA until the tire is raised a max-imum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
Removing a wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.
X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-pletely.
X Screw alignment bolt: into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.X Remove the wheel.
Changing a wheel 333
Wheelsandtires
Z
Mounting a new wheel
G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec-tion (Y page 330).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have beenapproved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and therespective wheel.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.
X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto thealignment bolt and push it on.
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-ger-tight.
X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.
X Vehicles with a collapsible sparewheel:inflate the collapsible spare wheel(Y page 340). Only then lower the vehicle.
Lowering the vehicle
G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.
X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clock-wise until the vehicle is once again standingfirmly on the ground.
X Place the jack to one side.X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-wise pattern in the sequence indicated (:toA). The specified tightening torque is96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicletools in the trunk again.
334 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicleswith AMG equipment: insert the coverinto the outer sill.
X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun-ted wheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 311).
i When you are driving with the collapsiblespare wheel mounted, the tire pressureloss warning system or the tire pressuremonitor cannot function reliably. Onlyrestart the tire pressure loss warning sys-tem or tire pressure monitor when thedefective wheel has been replaced with anew wheel.Vehicles with a tire pressure controlsystem: all installedwheelsmust be equip-ped with functioning sensors.
Wheel and tire combinations
General notes! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-ommends that you only use tires andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-cle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABSor ESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE=Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1=Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-tain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tiresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessories tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehiclenoise emissions or fuel consumption, mayotherwise be adversely affected. In addi-tion, when driving with a load, tire dimen-
sion variations could cause the tires tocome into contact with the bodywork andaxle components. This could result in dam-age to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than those tes-ted and approved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop.
! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since pre-vious damage cannot always be detectedon retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety ifretreaded tires are mounted. Do not mountused tires if you have no information abouttheir previous usage.
Overview of abbreviations used in the follow-ing tire tables:RBA: both axlesRFA: front axleRRA: rear axleThe recommended pressures for variousoperating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardwith the recommended tire pressures onthe B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of thefuel filler flap
Observe the notes on recommended tirepressures under various operating conditions(Y page 311).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with the mainte-nance recommendations of the tire manufac-turer in the vehicle document wallet.Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle(left and right)Rthe same type of tires at a given time (sum-mer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)
Wheel and tire combinations 335
Wheelsandtires
Z
Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-ferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 291).
Vehicles equipped withMOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that you addi-tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit ifyou mount tires that do not feature run-flatproperties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit maybe obtained from a qualified specialist work-shop.
i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.
i The following pages contain informationon approved wheel rims and tire sizes forequipping your vehicle with winter tires.Winter tires are not available at the factoryas standard equipment or optional extras.If you want to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, it may be necessaryto obtain wheel rims in the correspondingsize. The size of the approved winter tiresmay differ from the standard tires. This isdependent on the model and the equip-ment installed at the factory.The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
336 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires
Tires
SLK 300
Summer tiresR17
Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 225/45 R17 91 W2
RA: 245/40 R17 91 W2, 3
FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)
R18
Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL
RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL3
FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)
FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL4
RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL3, 4
FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)
Winter tiresR17
Tires Alloy wheels
BA: 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si2 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)
2 Available as MOExtended tires.3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.4 USA only.
Wheel and tire combinations 337
Wheelsandtires
Z
SLK 350
Summer tiresR17
Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 225/45 R17 91 W2
RA: 245/40 R17 91 W2, 3
FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)
R18
Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL
RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL3
FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)
FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL4
RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL3, 4
FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)
Winter tiresR17
Tires Alloy wheels
BA: 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si2 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)
2 Available as MOExtended tires.3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.4 USA only.
338 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires
Mercedes-AMG SLK 55
Summer tiresR18
Tires Alloy wheels
FA: 235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL
RA: 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL3
FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)
Winter tiresR18
Tires Alloy wheels
BA: 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)
FA: 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si
RA: 255/35 R18 94 V XL M+Si3
FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)
Emergency spare wheel
Important safety notes
G WARNINGThe wheel or tire size as well as the tire type ofthe spare wheel or emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ.Mounting an emergency spare wheel mayseverely impair the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Radapt your driving style accordingly anddrive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheel oremergency spare wheel that differs in size.Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size briefly.
Rdo not switch ESP® off.Rhave a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size replaced at thenearest qualified specialist workshop.Observe that the wheel and tire dimensionsas well as the tire type must be correct.
When using an emergency spare wheel orspare wheel of a different size, you must notexceed the maximum speed of 50 mph(80 km/h).Snow chains must not be mounted on emer-gency spare wheels.
General notesYou should regularly check the pressure ofthe emergency spare wheel, particularly priorto long trips, and correct the pressure as nec-essary (Y page 311). The applicable value is
3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
Emergency spare wheel 339
Wheelsandtires
Z
found on the wheel or under "Technical data"(Y page 342).An emergency spare wheel may also bemounted against the direction of rotation.Observe the time restriction on use as well asthe speed limitation specified on the emer-gency spare wheel.Replace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to theemergency spare wheel.
i When you are driving with the collapsiblespare wheel mounted, the tire pressureloss warning system or the tire pressuremonitor cannot function reliably. Onlyrestart the tire pressure loss warning sys-tem or tire pressure monitor when thedefective wheel has been replaced with anew wheel.Vehicles with tire pressure monitor:after mounting an emergency spare wheel,the system may still display the tire pres-sure of the removed wheel for a fewminutes. The value displayed for the moun-ted emergency spare wheel is not the sameas the current tire pressure of the emer-gency spare wheel.
Removing theemergency sparewheel
(Example)
The collapsible spare wheel can be found inthe stowage well under the trunk floor.
X Lift and remove the reversible floor panel inthe trunk (Y page 256).
X Turn retaining screw; counter-clockwiseand remove it.
X Remove collapsible spare wheel:.Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 331).
Stowing the emergency spare wheel! Only place the collapsible spare wheel inthe vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, mois-ture may get into the vehicle.
Take the following steps to stow a used col-lapsible spare wheel. Otherwise, the collaps-ible spare wheel will not fit in the trunk in theintended manner. Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you have this work carried out ata qualified specialist workshop.X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.X If possible, unscrew the valve insert fromthe valve and release the air.i Fully deflating the tires can take a fewminutes.
X Screw the valve insert back into the valve.X Screw the valve cap back on.X Pull the protective sheet provided with thespare wheel over the collapsible sparewheel.
X Stow the collapsible spare wheel in theemergency spare wheel well under thetrunk.
X Use the retaining screw to pierce the pro-tective sheet and fasten the collapsiblespare wheel in place.
Inflating the collapsible spare wheel! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel usingthe tire inflation compressor before lower-ing the vehicle. The wheel rim could other-wise be damaged.
340 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtires
! Do not operate the tire inflation compres-sor for longer than ten minutes at a timewithout a break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be oper-ated again once it has cooled down.
X Mount the collapsible spare wheel asdescribed (Y page 331).The collapsible spare wheel must be moun-ted before it is inflated.
X Pull plug? out of the housing.X Take the filler hose out of the housing.X Insert the yellow hose connector of thefiller hose into the guide in the housing andpush it into the fixture until the hose con-nector engages.
X Remove the cap from the valve on the col-lapsible spare wheel.
X Screw union nut: on the filler hose ontothe valve.
X Make sure the tire inflation compressor'son/off switchA is set to OFF.
X Insert plug? into the socket of the ciga-rette lighter or into a 12 V power socket inyour vehicle.Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter(Y page 258). Observe the notes on sock-ets (Y page 259).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 139).
X Press on/off switchA on the tire inflationcompressor to ON.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure isshown on pressure gauge=.
X Inflate the tire to the specified tire pres-sure.The specified tire pressure is printed on theyellow label of the emergency spare wheel.
X When the specified tire pressure has beenreached, press on/off switchA toOFF, onthe tire inflation compressor.The tire inflation compressor is switchedoff.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignitionlock.
X If the tire pressure is higher than the speci-fied pressure, press pressure release but-ton; until the correct tire pressure hasbeen reached.
X Unscrew union nut: on the filler hosefrom the valve.
X Screw the cap onto the valve of the col-lapsible spare wheel again.
Removing the filler hoseX To remove the filler hose from the tire infla-tion compressor, push down the rockerswitch on the hose connector and pull outthe filler hose.
X Stow plug? and the filler hose in the lowersection of the compressor housing.
X Stow the tire inflation compressor in thevehicle.
Emergency spare wheel 341
Wheelsandtires
Z
Technical data
All models
Collapsible emergency spare wheel5
Tires Alloy wheels
145/70-17 92 PTire pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi)
4.5 B x 17 H2Wheel offset: 0.47 in (12 mm)
Depending on the country, the engine and the wheels mounted, your vehicle may be equippedwith TIREFIT or a collapsible spare wheel.
i The specified tire pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency spare wheel.
5 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
342 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtires
Useful information ............................ 344Information regarding technicaldata .................................................... 344Vehicle electronics ........................... 344Identification plates ......................... 345Service products and filling capaci-ties ..................................................... 347Vehicle data ....................................... 352
343
Technicaldata
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard andoptional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.
i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 25).
Information regarding technical data
i The data stated here specifically refers toa vehicle with standard equipment. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthe data for all vehicle variants and trimlevels.
Vehicle electronics
Tampering with the engine electron-ics! Only have work carried out on the engineelectronics and its associated parts, suchas control units, sensors, actuating com-ponents and connector leads, at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Vehicle componentsmay otherwise wear more quickly and thevehicle's operating permit may be invalida-ted.
Retrofitting two-way radios andmobile phones (RF transmitters)
G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from modifiedor incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters caninterfere with the vehicle electronics. This cancompromise the operational safety of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
You should have all work to electrical andelectronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from incor-rectly operated RF transmitters can interferewith the vehicle electronics, for example:Rif the RF transmitter is not connected withan exterior antennaRthe exterior antenna has been installedincorrectly or is not a low-reflection type
This can compromise the operational safetyof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Have the low-reflection exterior antennamounted at a qualified specialist workshop.When operating RF transmitters in the vehi-cle, always connect them with the low-reflec-tion exterior antenna.
! The operating permitmay be invalidated ifthe instructions for installation and use ofRF transmitters are not observed.In particular, the following conditions mustbe complied with:Ronly approved wavebands may be used.Rcompliance with the maximum permissi-ble output in these wavebands isrequired.Ronly approved antenna positions may beused.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiationmay cause damage to your health and thehealth of others. Using an exterior antennatakes into account current scientific discus-sions relating to the possible health hazardsthat may result from electromagnetic fields.The following antenna positions may be usedif RF transmitters have been properly instal-led:
344 Vehicle electronicsTechnicaldata
Approved antenna positions: Rear fender
i On the rear fenders, it is recommended toposition the antenna on the side of thevehicle closest to the center of the road.
Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS21609 when retrofitting RF transmitters(Road Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installa-tion of aftermarket radio frequency transmit-ting equipment). Observe the legal require-ments for retrofittings.If your vehicle has installations for two-wayradio equipment, use the power supply orantenna connections intended for use withthe basic wiring. Be sure to observe the man-ufacturer's additional instructions wheninstalling.Deviations with respect to wavebands, maxi-mum transmission outputs or antenna posi-tions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.The maximum transmission output (PEAK) atthe base of the antenna must not exceed thefollowing values:
Waveband Maximumtransmission
output
Short wave3 - 54 MHz
100 W
4 m waveband74 - 88 MHz
30 W
2 m waveband144 - 174 MHz
50 W
Waveband Maximumtransmission
output
Trunked radio/Tetra380 - 460 MHz
10 W
70 cm waveband400 - 460 MHz
35 W
Mobile communications(2G/3G/4G)
10 W
The following can be used in the vehicle with-out restrictions:RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-sion output of up to 100 mWRRF transmitters with transmitter frequen-cies in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and amaximum transmission output of up to 2 W(trunked radio/Tetra)RMobile telephones (2G/3G/4G)There is no restriction for antenna positionson the outside of the vehicle for the followingwavebands:RTrunked radio/TetraR70 cm wavebandR2G/3G/4G
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)
Identification plates 345
Technicaldata
Z
X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Vehicle model
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code
i The data shown on the vehicle identifica-tion plate is used only as an example. Thisdata is different for every vehicle and candeviate from the data shown here. You canfind the data applicable to your vehicle onthe vehicle identification plate.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
X Slide the front-passenger seat to its frontmost position.
X Fold trim: upwards.VIN; can be seen.
The VIN can also be found in the followinglocations:Ron the vehicle identification plate(Y page 345)Ron the lower edge of the windshield(Y page 346)
Engine number
: Emission control information plate,including the certification of both federaland Californian emissions standards
; Engine number (stamped into the crank-case)
= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
346 Identification platesTechnicaldata
Service products and filling capaci-ties
Important safety notes
G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.
H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.
Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComply with all valid regulations with respectto handling, storing, and disposing of servicefluids.Components and service products must bematched. You should therefore only use prod-ucts that have been tested and approved byMercedes-Benz.Information about tested and approved prod-ucts can be obtained from an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-tion on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.
MB 229.51). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.
Fuel
Important safety notes
G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.
G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.
Tank capacity
Model Total capa-city
All models 18.5 US gal(70.0 l)
Service products and filling capacities 347
Technicaldata
Z
Model Of whichreserve
All models Approx.2.4 US gal(9.0 l)
Gasoline
Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-tion if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-fied specialist workshop and have the fueltank and fuel lines drained completely.
! Only refuel using unleaded premiumgrade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead toengine failure.
! Do not use the following:RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi-tives. Otherwise, engine damage mayoccur. This does not include cleaning addi-tives for the removal and prevention of res-idue build-up. Gasoline may only be mixedwith cleaning additives recommended byMercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You canobtain further information from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila-ble and you have to refuel with unleadedgasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol-lowing precautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with reg-ular unleaded gasoline and fill the restwith premium-grade unleaded gasolineas soon as possible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds over 3,000 rpm.
Youwill usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff for assis-tance.
i For further information, consult a quali-fied specialist workshop or visithttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You canrefuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
As a temporarymeasure, if the recommendedfuel is not available, you may also use regularunleaded gasoline with an octane rating of87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per-formance and increase fuel consumption.Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden accel-eration. Never refuel using fuel with a lowerAKI.Information on refueling (Y page 158).
Additives in gasoline! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Donot mix fuel additives with fuel. This doesnot include additives for the removal andprevention of residue buildup. gasolinemust only be mixed with additives recom-mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply withthe instructions for use on the productlabel. More information about recommen-
348 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata
ded additives can be obtained from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usebranded fuels that have additives.The quality of the fuel available in some coun-tries may not be sufficient. Residue couldbuild up in the injection system as a result. Insuch cases, and in consultation with anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gaso-line may be mixed with the cleaning additiverecommended by Mercedes-Benz. You mustobserve the notes and mixing ratios specifiedon the container.
Engine oil
General notes
! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of aspecification other than is necessary to ful-fill the prescribed service intervals. Do notchange the engine oil or oil filter in order toachieve longer replacement intervals thanthose prescribed. You could otherwisecause engine damage or damage to theexhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the service inter-val display regarding the oil change. Other-wise, you may damage the engine and theexhaust gas aftertreatment.
When handling engine oil, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 347).The engine oils are matched to the perform-ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and serviceintervals. You should therefore only useengine oils and oil filters that are approved forvehicles with maintenance systems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter. Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.
Model MB-Freigabeor MB-Approval
All models 229.5
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: use onlySAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils.
i MB approval is indicated on the oil con-tainers.
Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.
Model Capacity
SLK 300 6.7 US qt (6.3 l)
SLK 350 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
Mercedes‑AMGSLK 55
10.0 US qt (9.5 l)
Additives
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.
Engine oil viscosity
Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE classification(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside
Service products and filling capacities 349
Technicaldata
Z
temperatures. The table shows you whichSAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oilscan deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a resultof aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is thereforestrongly recommended that you carry out reg-ular oil changes using an approved engine oilwith the appropriate SAE classification.
Brake fluid
G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.
When handling brake fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 347).The brake fluid change intervals can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialist work-shop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced ata qualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.
Coolant
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.
! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g.on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.
i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.
Complywith the important safety precautionsfor service products when handling coolant(Y page 347).The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs thefollowing tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35‡ (-37†), the boiling point of the cool-
350 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata
ant during operation is approximately 266 ‡(130 †).The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-tion in the engine cooling system should:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protectiondown to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.
If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equalamounts of water and antifreeze/corrosioninhibitor.Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord-ance withMB Specifications for Service Prod-ucts 310.1.
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-led with a coolant mixture that ensuresadequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-tion.
i The coolant is checked with every main-tenance interval at a qualified specialistworkshop.
Filling capacitiesMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.
Model Capacity
SLK 300 Approx. 10.0 US qt(9.5 l)
SLK 350 Approx. 11.0 US qt(10.4 l)
Mercedes‑AMGSLK 55
Windshield washer system
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluidcould damage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.
When handling washer fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 347).At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB SummerFit.
X Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 partswater.
At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-Fit.For the correct mixing ratio refer to theinformation on the antifreeze reservoir.
i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.
Service products and filling capacities 351
Technicaldata
Z
Climate control system refrigerant
Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle isfilled with refrigerant R‑134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.
! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAGoil approved by Mercedes-Benz may beused. The approved PAG oil may not bemixed with any other PAG oil that is notapproved for R-134a refrigerant. Other-wise, the climate control system may bedamaged.
Service work, such as topping up refrigerantor replacing components, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. Allapplicable regulations must be adhered to,SAE standard J639 included.Always have work on the climate control sys-tem carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.
Refrigerant instruction label
Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerant
Warning symbol: advises you about:Rpossible dangersRhaving service work carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop
Filling capacities
Model Refrigerant
Mercedes‑AMGvehicles
22.2 ± 0.4 oz(630 ± 10 g)
All other models 19.4 ± 0.4 oz(550 ± 10 g)
Model PAG oil
Mercedes‑AMGvehicles
2.8 oz(80 g)
All other models 4.2 oz(120 g)
Vehicle data
General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:Rthe heights specified may vary as a resultof:- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximumpayload.
352 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata
Dimensions and weights
Model : Opening height
All models (70.7 in)(1796 mm)
Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.
Mercedes‑AMGvehicles
Vehicle length 163.2 in (4146mm)
Vehicle lengthwhen opening/closing the roof
Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors
79.0 in (2006 mm)
Vehicle height 51.2 in (1301 mm)
Vehicle height,when opening/closing the roof
Wheelbase 95.7 in (2430 mm)
Turning radius 34.6 ft (10.55 m)
Maximum trunkload
220 lb (100 kg)
All other models
Vehicle length 162.8 in (4134mm)
Vehicle lengthwhen opening/closing the roof
170.0 in (4319mm)
Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors
79.0 in (2006 mm)
Vehicle height 51.3 in (1303 mm)
Vehicle height,when opening/closing the roof
61.5 in (1561 mm)
Wheelbase 95.7 in (2430 mm)
Turning radius 34.5 ft (10.52 m)
Maximum trunkload
220 lb (100 kg)
Vehicle data 353
Technicaldata
Z
354
355
356
